Casio PX-S6000 Privia Digital Piano User Manual

USER’S GUIDE

6000

Initial Setup

Preparing a Power

Supply

Turning Power On or Off Using Pedals Using Commercially

Available Headphones

Playing the Digital Piano

Playing Notes with

Different Tones

Sounding Two Different

Tones at the Same Time

(Layer)

Splitting the Keyboard

Between Two Tones

(Split)

Using the Metronome

Changing Sound Reverberation and Ambiance

Using the Sound Mode

Effects (Hall Simulator/

Reverb and Surround)

Using Chorus (Chorus,

Flanger, Short Delay)

Using Microphone Effects Adjusting Acoustic Piano

Sound Characteristics

(Acoustic Simulator)

Using the Mixer Recording Performances in Real-Time

Using DSP Effects Adjusting the Volume

Level, Stereo Pan and

Effects for Each Part

Using the MIDI Recorder

to Record Performances

Recording a Performance

with the Audio Recorder

Registering a Setup Changing the Pitch

Connecting with a

Smart Device

Saving and Recalling

Performance Setups

(Registration)

Changing the Pitch in

Semitone Steps

(Transpose)

Fine Tuning a Pitch

(Master Tuning)

Using the Dedicated App

Cover

• When the Digital Piano is being operated on battery power only, notes may sound distorted when

performing or playing back a song at maximum volume. This is due to the difference between AC

adaptor power and battery power, and does not indicate Digital Piano malfunction. If you notice

distortion, switch to AC adaptor power or lower the volume level.

• Any reproduction of the contents of this manual, either in part or its entirety, is prohibited. Except

for your own, personal use, any other use of the contents of this manual without the consent of

CASIO is prohibited under copyright laws.

• IN NO EVENT SHALL CASIO BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING,

WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION,

LOSS OF INFORMATION) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THIS

MANUAL OR PRODUCT, EVEN IF CASIO HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF

SUCH DAMAGES.

• The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.

• The actual appearance of the product may be different from that shown in the illustrations in this

User’s Guide.

• The Bluetooth

word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

and any use of such marks by CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD. is under license. Other trademarks

and trade names are those of their respective owners.

• Company and product names used in this manual may be registered trademarks of others.

Included and Optional Accessories

Use only accessories that are specified for use with this Digital Piano.

Use of unauthorized accessories creates the risk of fire, electric shock, and personal injury.

• You can get information about accessories that are sold separately for this product from the

CASIO catalog available from your retailer, and from the CASIO website.

https://support.casio.com/global/en/emi/manual/PX-S6000/

EN-1

Overview and Setup EN-6

General Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-6

Touch Operation and Notation Used in this Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-9

Preparing a Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-10

Using an AC Adaptor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-10

Using Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-12

Turning Power On or Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-16

Auto Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-17

Auto Power Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-17

Disabling Auto Power Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-17

Power On Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-18

Panel Lights Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-18

Adjusting Display Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-19

Adjusting the Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-19

Using Commercially Available Headphones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-19

Outputting From the Speakers While Headphones are Connected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-20

Headphone Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-20

Using a Commercially Available Microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-21

Operation Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-22

Options for Connecting to Smart Devices, Computers, and External Audio Devices . . . . . . EN-23

Using the Included Wireless MIDI & Audio Adaptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-24

Returning to Initial Factory Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-24

Operations Common to All Modes EN-25

Using the Touch Buttons and Touch Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-25

Touch Ring Basic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-25

Setting the Sensitivity of the Touch Buttons and Touch Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-26

Setting the Volume of the Sound Made When the Touch Ring is Used (Operation Click Volume). . . EN-26

Basic Operation for Contents of the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-27

Selecting Operation Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-27

Navigating the Hierarchy of Setting Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-30

The F Button Menu and FUNCTION Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-31

Using the F Button Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-31

Using the FUNCTION Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-33

Text Character Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-35

Acoustic Settings for the Digital Piano and Playback of the Demo Songs EN-38

Selecting the Piano Position Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-38

Listening to the Demo Songs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-39

Playing Notes with Different Tones EN-41

Selecting a Single Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-41

Selecting a Tone by Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-41

Selecting a Tone by Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-42

Selecting a Tone with the Touch Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-42

Selecting a Tone with the F Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-43

Guitar and Bass Tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-43

Contents

EN-2

Sounding Two Different Tones at the Same Time (Layer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-44

Layering Two Tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-44

Unlayering the Keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-45

Splitting the Keyboard Between Two Tones (Split). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-46

Splitting the Keyboard Between Two Different Tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-46

Changing the Split Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-47

Unsplitting the Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-47

Changing Part Settings (Volume Level, Octave Shift, Tuning, etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-48

Applying Effects EN-49

Using the Sound Mode Effects (Hall Simulator/Reverb and Surround) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-49

Enabling or Disabling the Hall Simulator/Reverb and Surround Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-49

Specifying the Hall Simulator/Reverb Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-50

Adjusting the Depth of the Hall Simulator/Reverb Effect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-51

Specifying the Surround Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-51

Using DSP Effects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-52

Enabling or Disabling DSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-52

Selecting a DSP Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-53

Configuring DSP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-53

Using Chorus (Chorus, Flanger, Short Delay) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-57

Changing the Chorus Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-57

Adjusting the Depth of the Chorus Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-57

Adjusting Brilliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-58

Adjusting Acoustic Piano Sound Characteristics (Acoustic Simulator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-59

List of Acoustic Piano Sound Setting Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-60

Using Microphone Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-61

Enabling or Disabling the Microphone Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EN-61

Specifying the Microphone Effect Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-62

Changing Microphone Effect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-63

Using the Mixer EN-65

Adjusting the Volume Level, Stereo Pan and Effects for Each Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-65

List of Mixer Setting Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-66

Changing the Sound During a Performance EN-67

Using Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-67

PEDAL UNIT jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-67

EXPRESSION/ASSIGNABLE jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EN-68

Enabling/Disabling the Pedal Operation for Each Part (Upper 1/Upper 2/Lower). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-71

Using the Knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-72

Using the Knobs to Change Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EN-72

Changing the Function Assigned to a Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EN-73

Resetting the Parameters of the Functions Currently Assigned to the Knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-76

Using the CONTROL Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-77

Selecting the Function Assigned to the CONTROL Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-77

Using the Pitch Bend Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-79

Changing the Pitch Bend Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-79

Enabling/Disabling the Pitch Bend Wheel Operation for Each Part (Upper 1/Upper 2/Lower) . . . . . . EN-80

Contents

EN-3

Using the Metronome EN-81

Starting or Stopping the Metronome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-81

Changing the Metronome Settings (Tempo, Beat, Pattern, etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-81

Using the Arpeggiator EN-84

Enabling or Disabling the Arpeggiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-84

Changing the Arpeggiator Pattern and Other Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-84

Saving and Recalling Performance Setups (Registration) EN-86

Saving a Setup Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-87

Changing a Registration Bank Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-88

Recalling a Setup Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-89

Freeze Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-90

Using a Pedal to Cycle Through Multiple Setup Registrations (Sequential Recall) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-91

Registration Memory Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-92

Saving to an External Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-93

Using the F Button Set EN-94

Preset F Button Set List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-94

Editing an F Button Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-95

Assigning a Function to an F Button (Creating a User F Button Set) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-95

Changing the Name of an F Button Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-100

Erasing an F Button Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-102

F Button Function List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-103

Listening to Songs (SONG Mode) EN-106

Data Types of Playable Songs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-106

Playing Back MIDI Data or Audio Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-107

Operations While Playing Back MIDI Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-109

Sounding Metronome While Playing Back MIDI Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-109

Adjusting the Volume Level of MIDI Data Playback (MIXER Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-109

Deleting a User Song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-109

Operations While Playing Back Audio Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-110

Audio Center Cancel (Vocal Cut) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-110

Adjusting the Volume Level or Effect Depth of Audio Data Playback (MIXER Settings). . . . . . . . . . EN-110

Recording Performances EN-111

MIDI Recorder and Audio Recorder Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-111

Using the MIDI Recorder to Record Performances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-113

Recording with the MIDI Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-113

Recording a Second Track Over the First (System Track + Solo Track) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-117

Playing Back MIDI Recorder Songs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-118

Deleting a MIDI Recorder Song (Entire Song/Individual Tracks) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-119

Items Reflected in Contents When Recording to the MIDI Recorder Song. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-120

Recording a Performance with the Audio Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-122

Recording Using the Audio Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-122

Playing Back a Song from the Audio Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-125

Deleting a Song from the Audio Recorder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-126

Contents

EN-4

Adjusting Keyboard Sensitivity EN-127

Changing Keyboard Response to Key Velocity (Touch Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-127

Changing Touch Response Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-127

Adjusting the Timing of Key Press to Sound (Hammer Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-128

Adjusting the Hammer Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-128

Adjusting the Timing of Key Release to Sound Damping (Key-off Response) . . . . . . . . . . EN-129

Adjusting the Key-off Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-129

Changing the Pitch EN-130

Changing the Pitch in Semitone Steps (Transpose) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-130

Changing the Transpose Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-130

Fine Tuning a Pitch (Master Tuning). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-130

Adjusting the Tuning Separately for Each Part (Upper 1/Upper 2/Lower) (Part Fine Tune) . . . . . . . EN-131

Changing the Pitch in Octave Units (Octave Shift) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-132

Using Octave Shift Separately for Each Part (Upper 1/Upper 2/Lower) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-132

Changing the Scale Tuning (Temperament) of the Keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-133

Changing the Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-133

Enabling or Disabling Piano Stretch Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-134

Splitting the Keyboard for Duet Play EN-135

Using the Duet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-135

Configuring Duet Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-137

USB Flash Drive EN-138

Preparing a USB Flash Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-138

Supported USB Flash Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-138

Data Types Supported by the Digital Piano . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-139

Connecting a USB Flash Drive to and Detaching It from the Digital Piano. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-141

Formatting a USB Flash Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-142

Saving MIDI Files or Audio Files for Playback on your Digital Piano to

a USB Flash Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-143

Saving Digital Piano Data to a USB Flash Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-143

Loading USB Flash Drive Data into the Digital Piano’s Internal Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-145

Deleting a USB Flash Drive File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-146

Renaming a USB Flash Drive File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-147

Configuring MIDI Settings EN-148

Wireless Connections EN-149

Configuring Wireless (Bluetooth) Connection Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-149

Checking the Wireless Connection Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-149

Enabling and Disabling the Digital Piano’s Wireless Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-149

Notification Tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-150

Connecting the Digital Piano with a Bluetooth Low Energy MIDI Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-151

Connecting the Digital Piano with a Bluetooth Audio Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-152

Pairing the Digital Piano with a Bluetooth Audio Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-152

Deleting Bluetooth Audio Device Pairing Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-153

Contents

EN-5

Using the Dedicated App EN-155

About the App for Smart Devices (CASIO MUSIC SPACE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-155

Connecting with External Devices EN-157

Playing Sound from a Smart Device on This Digital Piano

(Bluetooth Audio Connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-157

Playing Audio from a Smart Device or Other Bluetooth-compatible Device on this Digital Piano. . . EN-157

Adjusting the Volume Level or Effect Depth of Bluetooth Audio (MIXER Settings). . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-157

Bluetooth Audio Center Cancel (Vocal Cut) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-158

Using MIDI with a Connected Computer or Smart Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-159

Connecting the Digital Piano with a Computer via USB MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-159

Connecting the Digital Piano with a Smart Device via USB MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-161

Outputting Digital Piano Notes Through an Amplifier or Audio Equipment

(LINE OUT jacks). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-163

Connecting to Audio Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-163

Connecting to a Musical Instrument Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-164

Deleting All Data in the Digital Piano’s Internal Memory EN-165

Troubleshooting EN-166

Error Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-168

Reference EN-170

Product Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-170

Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-173

FUNCTION Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-176

DSP List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-184

Preset DSP List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-184

List of Effects in the DSP Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-187

Parameter List of DSP Module Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-189

Amp Cab Type List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-202

IR Type List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-204

Microphone Effects List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-226

Microphone Effect Type List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-226

List of Effects in the Microphone Effects Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-227

Parameter List of Module Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-228

Arpeggiator List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN-233

MIDI Implementation Chart

EN-6

■ Front Panel

Overview and Setup

General Guide

1 P (Power) button

2 Volume knob

3 LED (Red, White)

4 a button

5 0REC button

6 FUNCTION button

7 F1 button

8 F2 button

9 F3 button

bk F4 button

bl ENTER button

bm EXIT button

bn Touch ring

bo PIANO button

bp E. PIANO button

bq OTHERS button

br Display

bs K1 knob

bt K2 knob

ck CONTROL button

cl PITCH BEND wheel

clck

1 2 3 4 5 6

bo bp bqbnbl

8 9 bk

Overview and Setup

EN-7

Touch Buttons and Touch Ring

Turning on Digital Piano power causes all of the touch buttons (4 to bm, bo to bq) and the touch ring

(bn) to light. The above illustration shows when all buttons are lit. During actual operation, only the

buttons that are currently enabled are lit or flashing.

Keyboard note names and pitches

The keyboard note names and pitches used in this manual follow the international standard. Middle C is

C4, the lowest C is C1, and the highest C is C8. The illustration below shows keyboard key note names

from C4 through C5.

■ Front

■ Back

cm PHONES jacks

Top: stereo mini phone jack

(Mini TRS phone)

Bottom: stereo standard phone jack

(TRS phone)

cn USB Type A port

co USB Type B port

cp MIC VOLUME knob

cq MIC IN jack

cr LINE OUT R, L/MONO jacks

cs EXPRESSION/ASSIGNABLE jack

ct PEDAL UNIT jack

dk DC 24V terminal

C4 D4 E4 F4 G4 A4 B4 C5

C{4E}4F{4A}4B}4

cn co cp cq cs ct dkcr

Overview and Setup

EN-8

■ Display (Top Screen)

The top screen is the screen that appears on the display when the Digital Piano is turned on.



Part name, Tone number



Indicators



Tone name



F Button Set name



F Button Menu

■ Preparing the Music Stand

Inverted screens

The display of this Digital Piano shows screens white on a black background; however, this guide

depicts them as black on a white background.

Music Stand

Overview and Setup

EN-9

■ Touch Ring Operation and Notation

■ Touch Button Operation and Notation

■ F Buttons (F1 to F4) Operation and Notation

Touch Operation and Notation Used in this Guide

This operation is shown like this

Touch and immediately release the top, bottom, left or

right edge of the touch ring

Touch top, bottom, left or right on the

touch ring.

It is also written as follows:

• Use the touch ring to change the value.

• Use the touch ring to select “___”.

Trace the circumference of the touch ring with your finger

in a counterclockwise or clockwise direction

(Acts as a controller to change settings.)

Trace on the touch ring.

It is also written as follows:

• Use the touch ring to change the value.

• Use the touch ring to select “___”.

This operation is shown like this

Touch and immediately release the EXIT button Touch the EXIT button.

Hold the EXIT button down for about 2 seconds and

then release it

Touch and hold the EXIT button.

This operation is shown like this

Touch and immediately release the F1 button Touch the F1 button (DEMO).

It is also written as follows:

• Touch the F button to which “DEMO”

is assigned.

F Button Menu on the display:

Overview and Setup

EN-10

The Digital Piano can be powered by an AC adaptor or AA batteries (alkaline or rechargeable nickel-

metal-hydride).

Use only the AC adaptor (JEITA Standard, with unified polarity plug) that comes with this Digital Piano.

Use of a different type of AC adaptor can cause malfunction of the Digital Piano.

Use the supplied power cord to connect the AC adaptor.

The AC adaptor cannot be repaired.

AC Adaptor Usage Environment Temperature: 0 to 40°C

Humidify: 10% to 90%RH

Output Polarity: &

• Never connect the AC adaptor that comes with this Digital Piano to any other device besides

this Digital Piano. Doing so creates the risk of malfunction.

• Make sure the Digital Piano is turned off before plugging in or unplugging the AC adaptor.

• The AC adaptor will become warm to the touch after very long use. This is normal and does

not indicate malfunction.

• Unplug the AC adaptor from the power outlet if you do not plan to use the Digital Piano for a

long time.

Preparing a Power Supply

Using an AC Adaptor

Household power outlet

AC adaptor

DC 24V terminal

Power cord

Overview and Setup

EN-11

■ Disconnect Protection Precautions

(1) Never pull on the cord with excessive force.

(2) Never repeatedly pull on the cord.

(3) Never twist the cord at the base of the plug or connector.

(4) Loop and bundle the power cord, but never wind it around the AC adaptor.

(5) Before moving the Digital Piano, be sure to unplug the AC adaptor from the power outlet.

■ Locating the AC Adaptor for Use

• When using the AC adaptor, put in a location that satisfies the conditions below.

– A location free of splashing liquids.

The AC adaptor is designed for indoor use only. Do not put it in a location where it may become

wet and do not place a vase or any other container of liquid on top of it.

– A location that is not humid.

– A roomy, well ventilated location.

Do not cover the AC adaptor with newspaper, table cloth, curtain, or any other type of fabric.

– Use a power outlet that is located near the Digital Piano.

This will let you immediately unplug from the power outlet should any problem occur.

• When using the AC adaptor, place it on the floor with its label surface downwards. The AC adaptor

becomes prone to emitting electromagnetic waves when the label surface is facing upwards.

Overview and Setup

EN-12

• Be sure to turn off power before loading batteries.

• Use commercially available AA-size alkaline batteries or AA-size eneloop rechargeable

batteries.

• Low battery power can cause abnormal operation. If this happens, replace batteries with new

ones. If you are using rechargeable batteries, charge them.

• Note the precautions below while the Digital Piano is turned upside down to load batteries.

− Take care to avoid injury due to pinching your fingers under the Digital Piano.

− Do not allow the Digital Piano to tip over or otherwise be subjected to strong impact. Impact

can damage the volume knob and keyboard keys.

• Be sure to replace batteries at least once a year, even if there is no indication of low battery

power. Dead rechargeable batteries in particular may deteriorate if they are left in the product.

Remove rechargeable batteries from the product as soon as possible after they go dead.

■ Rechargeable Batteries

Note the precautions below when using rechargeable batteries.

• Use Panasonic Group AA-size eneloop rechargeable batteries. Do not use any other type of

batteries.

• Use only the specified charger to charge batteries.

• Rechargeable batteries must be removed from the product for charging.

• Dead rechargeable batteries may deteriorate if they are left in the product. Remove rechargeable

batteries from the product as soon as possible after they go dead.

• For information about using rechargeable batteries or their specified charger, be sure to read the

user documentation and precautions that come with each item, and use them only as directed.

Using Batteries

Overview and Setup

EN-13

■ To load batteries

Open the battery cover on the bottom of the Digital Piano.

Load eight AA-size batteries into the battery compartment.

• Load batteries with their positive + and negative - ends facing correctly.

Insert the tabs of the battery cover into the holes along the side of the battery

compartment, and close the cover.

• Configure the setting below to specify the type of batteries you loaded.

Tab

Overview and Setup

EN-14

■ To select the Battery Type

Select the battery type that matches the battery installed in this Digital Piano’s battery case.

Touch the FUNCTION button.

The FUNCTION menu appears.

Touch the top or bottom of the touch ring to select “SYSTEM” and then touch the

ENTER button.

Touch the top or bottom of the touch ring to select “Battery Type” and then touch

the ENTER button.

The “Battery Type” screen appears.

Touch the top or bottom of the touch ring to select the battery type.

Alkaline: Alkaline batteries

Ni-MH: Rechargeable nickel metal hydride batteries

Overview and Setup

EN-15

■ Low Battery and Replace Battery Notifications

A battery icon appears on the display to let you know when battery power is getting low.

Low Battery Indicator

Replace Battery Indicator

• To avoid possible injury, close the cover of the battery compartment before using the Digital

Piano.

• Note that the battery compartment on the bottom of the Digital Piano may become hot in use.

• Using the Digital Piano while batteries are very low can cause it to turn off suddenly. This can

cause data stored in the Digital Piano’s internal memory to be corrupted or lost.

Low battery icon (not flashing)

Replace battery icon (flashing)

Overview and Setup

EN-16

Before turning on the power, turn the volume knob to the position shown below.

Press the P (Power) button to turn on the Digital Piano.

When the power is turned on, “Welcome” appears on the display.

• When the display changes to the top screen, the Digital Piano is ready to use.

• The time it takes for the Digital Piano to become ready to use depends on the internal memory

usage.

• Do not touch the pitch bend wheel when turning on the power.

• After pressing the P (Power) button, do not step on any pedals until the top screen appears.

• The Digital Piano may not turn on if the P (Power) button is pressed lightly, but this is not a

malfunction. If this happens, firmly press the P (Power) button again.

Use the volume knob to adjust the volume.

To turn off the Digital Piano, press and hold the P (Power) button for a moment.

• The light of the touch ring goes around once and goes out, and the message “Bye” appears on

the display.

• In its initial state, when the Digital Piano is turned on without the Wireless MIDI & Audio Adaptor

installed, the indicator flashes briefly in the upper-right corner of the top screen to indicate

that the Wireless MIDI & Audio Adaptor is not installed.

• Even after the power is turned off using the P (Power) button, the Digital Piano remains in standby

mode with a small current flowing through it. Always disconnect the AC adaptor from the power outlet

when the Digital Piano will not be used for an extended period or when there is a risk of lightning.

• When Auto Resume (page EN-17) is set to “Off”, turning off the power will reset various settings, but

the Digital Piano still retains the following settings.

Turning Power On or Off

Tuning, LCD Contrast, pairing information (Bluetooth connection history), expression pedal type,

expression pedal calibration, Touch Button Sensitivity, Touch Ring Sensitivity, Operation Click

Volume, Auto Power Off, Wireless Notification Volume, Battery Type

Top screen

Overview and Setup

EN-17

When the Digital Piano is turned off, various settings such as tone numbers are reset. If “SYSTEM” >

“Auto Resume” is set to “On” in the FUNCTION menu (page EN-33), most settings will be retained even

when the power is turned off.

This Digital Piano is designed to turn off automatically to avoid wasting power after no operation is

performed for a preset amount of time. The Auto Power Off trigger time is about four hours when power

is being supplied by the AC adaptor, or six minutes under battery power.

You can disable Auto Power Off to ensure that power does not turn off automatically during a concert,

etc.

• The Auto Power Off function does not work when there is any input from a smart device that is

wirelessly connected to the Digital Piano.

Touch the FUNCTION button.

The FUNCTION menu appears.

Touch the top or bottom of the touch ring to select “SYSTEM” and then touch the

ENTER button.

Touch the top or bottom of the touch ring to select “Auto Power Off” and then

touch the ENTER button.

The “Auto Power Off” screen appears.

Touch the top or bottom of the touch ring and select “Off”.

Auto Resume

Auto Power Off

Disabling Auto Power Off

Overview and Setup

EN-18

When the AC adaptor is used, the touch button will flash after six minutes of inactivity to notify the user

that the power has not been turned off. The power-off notification function works when “SYSTEM” >

“Power On Alert” in the FUNCTION menu (page EN-33) is set to “On” (default). If set to “Off”, no alert

will be given.

Note that the “Power On Alert” does not function if battery power is being used. After about one minute

of inactivity, all LEDs except the FUNCTION button will turn off. See “Panel Lights Off” (page EN-18).

While the top screen (the screen that appears immediately after the power is turned on) is displayed,

touching and holding the EXIT button until the light of the touch ring goes around once and then goes

out will turn off most of the lights on the front panel, except the FUNCTION button and touch ring (the

state the panel lights off). The front panel gives off a small amount of light, conserving power and

making it easier to concentrate on playing the keyboard.

The Digital Piano maintains the state the panel lights off even when you play the keyboard or operate

the pedals, pitch bend wheel, K1 and K2 knobs, or CONTROL button. Touch the FUNCTION

button or press the P (Power) button briefly to deactivate it.

• When the battery is used as the power source for the Digital Piano, it will automatically enter the

“panel lights off” state to conserve power if the front panel (touch buttons, touch ring, etc.) is not used

for about one minute.

• Even when using the AC adaptor, the lights can be set to turn off automatically after a set period to

conserve power when no buttons are pressed for a certain amount of time (the light does not turn off

automatically under initial default settings). Use “SYSTEM” > “Panel Light” in the FUNCTION menu

(page EN-33) to specify the time (5, 30, 60, or 120 seconds) before the lights turn off.

• The panel light does not turn off during song playback or recording, or while there is an input from a

smart device.

Power On Alert

Panel Lights Off

Overview and Setup

EN-19

To adjust the contrast of the display, use “SYSTEM” > “LCD Contrast” in the FUNCTION menu (page

EN-33).

Control the master volume of the Digital Piano using the volume knob.

• The mixer function (page EN-65) allows you to individually adjust the volume of the keyboard, song

playback volume, and input volume from the MIC IN jack.

Using headphones cuts off output from the built-in speakers, which means you can practice playing

even late at night without disturbing others.

• Be sure to turn down the volume level before connecting headphones to the PHONES jack.

• Do not listen to very high volume output over headphones for long periods. Doing so creates

the risk of hearing damage.

• When connecting headphones to the stereo mini phone jack, be sure to use a stereo mini

phone plug (Mini TRS phone). Use of other types of plugs is not supported.

• If you are using headphones that require an adaptor plug, make sure you do not leave the

adaptor plugged in when you unplug the headphones. If you do, nothing will sound from the

speakers when you play.

• Use commercially available headphones that meet the following conditions.

− Maximum input: 150mW or greater

− Impedance: 32Ω or greater

• Use of the optional CP-16 headphones is not recommended.

Adjusting Display Contrast

Adjusting the Volume

Using Commercially Available Headphones

PHONES jacks

(Top: stereo mini phone jack (Mini TRS phone)/

Bottom: stereo standard phone jack (TRS phone))

Overview and Setup

EN-20

If “SYSTEM” > “Speaker Out” in the FUNCTION menu (page EN-33) is set to “On”, sound will come out

of the speakers even if headphones are plugged into either PHONES jack.

• The setting values and details for this are as follows:

When “SYSTEM” > “Headphone Mode” in the FUNCTION menu (page EN-33) is set to “On” (the initial

default setting) and headphones are used, the sound quality is automatically corrected to reproduce

how an acoustic piano would sound when it naturally reaches the ears of a listener.

• The Headphone Mode setting is enabled when a plug is inserted into either PHONES jack.

• Regardless of the Headphone Mode setting, the sound output from the PHONES jacks and the

LINE OUT jacks are the same.

Outputting From the Speakers While Headphones are Connected

Setting value Description

Off The speakers do not output sound regardless of whether a plug is inserted into

the PHONES jack.

On The speakers output sound regardless of whether a plug is inserted into the

PHONES jack.

Auto When a plug is inserted into the PHONES jack, the Digital Piano’s speakers do

not output sound; when a plug is not inserted, the speakers output sound.

Headphone Mode

Overview and Setup

EN-21

You can connect a commercially available dynamic microphone to the MIC IN jack and sound audio

from the microphone with the Digital Piano.

You can adjust the volume level of microphone input with the MIC VOLUME knob. Microphone

volume control is independent from overall Digital Piano volume.

• Before connecting a microphone, make sure that the Digital Piano and microphone are turned

off.

• Before connecting, set both overall Digital Piano volume and mic volume to their lowest

levels. Adjust volume settings to appropriate levels after connecting the microphone.

• When connecting a microphone to the MIC IN jack, be sure to use a standard phone plug

(TS phone). Use of other types of plugs is not supported.

• Various effects can be applied to the microphone input. For more information, see “Using

Microphone Effects” (page EN-61).

• The mixer function allows you to independently adjust the volume of the microphone input audio and

the send value to the Hall Simulator/Reverb. For more information, see “Using the Mixer” (page

EN-65).

Using a Commercially Available Microphone

MIC VOLUME knob

MIC IN jack

Overview and Setup

EN-22

When Operation Lock is enabled (“On” or “Auto”), all button operations except the P (Power) button

and the Operation Lock release operation are disabled to prevent accidental operation during a

performance.

Touch the FUNCTION button.

The FUNCTION menu appears.

Touch the top or bottom of the touch ring to select “SYSTEM” and then touch the

ENTER button.

Touch the top or bottom of the touch ring to select “Operation Lock” and then

touch the ENTER button.

The “Operation Lock” screen appears.

Touch the top or bottom of the touch ring to change the setting value.

Touch and hold the EXIT button to exit settings.

When “On” is selected, all buttons except the FUNCTION button are disabled.

Operation Lock

Setting value Description

Off Disables the Operation Lock.

On The lights of all buttons except the FUNCTION button turn off, and all button

operations except the P (Power) button and the FUNCTION button are

disabled.

Auto All button operations are disabled while playing. When you stop playing, it will

return to the normal state (the same state as when “Operation Lock” is “Off”) after

about one second.

Overview and Setup

EN-23

The connection method for an external device depends on what you want to do. Refer to the section

indicated for “Connection method” that matches “What you want to do” in the table below.

• “Smart devices” in the table below means smartphones (iPhone, Android) or tablets (iPad, Android).

• For details about “CASIO’s dedicated app” mentioned in the table below, see “About the App for

Smart Devices (CASIO MUSIC SPACE)” (page EN-155).

*1 Using the included Wireless MIDI & Audio Adaptor.

*2 Use with apps other than CASIO’s dedicated app is not guaranteed to work.

Options for Connecting to Smart Devices, Computers,

and External Audio Devices

Connect via

Wireless Connection

Connect via Cable

Bluetooth

audio

Bluetooth Low

Energy MIDI

USB cable Audio cable

I want to use CASIO’s

dedicated app on my smart

device

“Using the Dedicated App”

(page EN-155)

—

I want to play the sound

output by a smart device

from this Digital Piano using

Bluetooth audio

“Playing Sound

from a Smart

Device on This

Digital Piano

(Bluetooth

Audio

Connection)”

(page EN-157)

———

I want to connect my PC or

smart device to the Digital

Piano and use MIDI

— *2

“Using MIDI

with a

Connected

Computer or

Smart Device”

(page EN-159)

—

I want to output the sound

from this Digital Piano

through external speakers or

audio equipment

———

“Outputting

Digital Piano

Notes Through

an Amplifier or

Audio

Equipment

(LINE OUT

jacks)”

(page EN-163)

Connection method

What you want to do

Overview and Setup

EN-24

To pair this Digital Piano with a Bluetooth

wireless technology-capable external device, you need to

plug the Wireless MIDI & Audio Adaptor into the Digital Piano’s USB Type A port.

• Turn off the Digital Piano before disconnecting the Wireless MIDI & Audio Adaptor.

You can use Factory Reset to return the Digital Piano’s stored data and settings to their initial factory

defaults any time you want. For more information, see “To return all Digital Piano settings and data to

their initial factory defaults (Factory Reset)” (page EN-165).

Using the Included Wireless MIDI & Audio Adaptor

Returning to Initial Factory Defaults

USB Type A port

Wireless MIDI & Audio Adaptor

EN-25

• Unless otherwise specifically noted, all of the procedures in this manual assume that the

Digital Piano is in its initial power on state (immediately after you turn on power). If you run

into problems with a procedure, turn Digital Piano power off and back on, and then try

performing the procedure again.

• Note that turning off Digital Piano power during a procedure causes any pending unsaved

data to be deleted.

Turning on Digital Piano power causes the touch buttons and touch ring to light.

The touch ring is used to move the cursor between items on a list and to change values.

* While the close-up screen (page EN-29) or the value list screen (page EN-30) is being displayed,

touching the top or bottom of the touch ring changes values.

Operations Common to All Modes

Using the Touch Buttons and Touch Ring

Touch Ring Basic Operation

• Trace along the touch ring to continuously

change the value of the currently selected item

on the screen.

• Touch the left or right of the touch ring to

change the value one unit at a time. Touch the

top or bottom of the touch ring to move the

cursor between items

Tracing clockwise (+) along the touch ring until

the value becomes its maximum value, it will stop

at that value. Likewise, tracing counterclockwise

(–) along the touch ring until the value becomes

its minimum value, it will stop at that value.

Touching the left of the touch ring (–) after the

minimum value is reached sets the maximum

value. Likewise, touching the right of the touch

ring (+) after the maximum value is reached sets

the minimum value.

Decrease the

value (–)

Increase the

value (+)

Move the cursor up (↑)

Decrease the

value (–)

Increase the

value (+)

Move the cursor down (↓)

Operations Common to All Modes

EN-26

• For an example of a specific operation using the touch ring, see “Basic Operation for Contents of the

Display” (page EN-27).

• To reset the value of the item currently selected on the screen to its initial default value, touch and

hold the FUNCTION button and touch the top, bottom, left, or right of the touch ring.

The sensitivity of the touch buttons can be adjusted using “SYSTEM” > “Touch Btn Sense” in the

FUNCTION menu (page EN-33). You can also adjust the sensitivity of the touch ring using “SYSTEM” >

“Touch Ring Sense”.

■ If Operation Becomes Difficult Due to Low Sensitivity Settings

If operation becomes difficult or impossible after using the FUNCTION menu to lower the touch button

and touch ring sensitivity, you can set the touch button and touch ring sensitivity to a higher level than

normal using the procedure below.

Turn off the Digital Piano.

While pressing the C8 key (rightmost key), press the P (Power) button.

• You can release the P (Power) button immediately, but do not release the C8 key until

“Welcome” appears on the display.

The “SYSTEM” > “Op. Click Volume” in the FUNCTION menu (page EN-33) can be used to adjust the

volume of the click sound made when the touch ring is used.

Setting the Sensitivity of the Touch Buttons and Touch Ring

Setting the Volume of the Sound Made When the Touch Ring is Used

(Operation Click Volume)

Operations Common to All Modes

EN-27

The dots ( ) shown on the display of the Digital Piano indicate items that can be used with the touch

ring or ENTER button.

Select the item to adjust and use the touch ring to change its value. Try out the following operations.

Turn on the Digital Piano.

The top screen appears.

Touch the top or bottom of the touch ring.

Each touch of the touch ring moves the cursor ( ) between the dots.

Basic Operation for Contents of the Display

Selecting Operation Items

− When the cursor is on a dot ( ), you can change the value of that item by tracing along the

touch ring.

− When the cursor is on a dot ( ), touch the ENTER button to display the list screen

(category list screen or value list screen) corresponding to that item*.

− Move the cursor ( ) by touching the top or bottom of the touch ring.

* Operations after touching the ENTER button are described in a later

section.

Operations Common to All Modes

EN-28

Move the cursor ( ) to the item whose value you want to change.

For example, move the cursor ( ) to “Part name and tone number”.

Touch the left or right or trace along the touch ring.

The value at the cursor position (tone number in this example) changes.

• Instead of touching the left or right or tracing along the touch ring, you can use the value list that

appears when you touch the ENTER button. Refer to the following to use this method.

“Navigating the Hierarchy of Setting Items” (page EN-30)

“Using the F Button Menu” (page EN-31)

“Using the FUNCTION Menu” (page EN-33)

Part name and tone number

Operations Common to All Modes

EN-29

■ Close-Up Screen

If the setting of “SYSTEM” > “Close-up” in the FUNCTION menu (page EN-33) is changed from “Off”

(default value) to “On”, the display will show a “close-up screen” that magnifies the value whenever you

trace along the touch ring to change a value. For example, in Step 4 above, the following screen will

appear.

• While the close-up screen is displayed, you can also change values by touching the top, bottom, left,

or right of the touch ring.

• The display returns to the original screen after about 5 seconds once you remove your finger from

the touch ring.

• To immediately return to the previous screen, touch the EXIT button.

Operations Common to All Modes

EN-30

Use the settings list screen to select from many options for tones, functions, or specific settings. The

following is a schematic for navigating the hierarchy of setting items and for the sequence of operations

when selecting categories, setting values, etc.

Try out using the ENTER button, EXIT button, and touch ring while referring to the following.

Navigating the Hierarchy of Setting Items

Touch left or right or trace along the touch ring to directly select the setting value of the item

highlighted by the cursor ( ).

Touching the ENTER button brings up a list of options for the item highlighted by the cursor

( ), allowing you to select a setting value using the touch ring while viewing the list.

Indicates the currently displayed page/total

number of pages. You can turn the page by

touching the left or right of the touch ring.

The cursor ( ) indicates the currently

selected item.

You can move the cursor by touching the top or

bottom or by tracing along the touch ring.

The value at the position

changes

(or touch left or right)

Trace along the touch ring

Touch and hold the EXIT button (returns to



Top screen)



Top screen



Category list screen



List of values

Touch the EXIT button

Touch the

ENTER button

Touch the ENTER button

Operations Common to All Modes

EN-31

• Touch and hold the EXIT button to return to the top screen.

• The description of each operating procedure in this manual omits the step of returning to the first

screen using the EXIT button at the end of each procedure.

The F button menu shown at the bottom of the display represents the functions that will be activated

when you touch the F buttons (F1 to F4).

The functions displayed in the F button menu are switched by changing the F Button Set (01 to 30).

The F Button Menu and FUNCTION Menu

Using the F Button Menu

F Button Set

F Button Menu

F buttons (F1 to F4)

Operations Common to All Modes

EN-32

■ To change the F Button Set

Touch the top or bottom of the touch ring on the top screen to move the cursor

( ) to the F Button Set row.

Touch the left or right or trace along the touch ring.

The F Button Set changes and the content of the F button menu changes, as well.

• You can also change the F Button Set using the F Button Set list screen that appears when you

touch the ENTER button in Step 2.

• The 30 F Button Sets include 14 presets (fixed F button functions and set names) and 16 open slots

where users can freely assign functions and set names (user F Button Sets). For more information,

see “Using the F Button Set” (page EN-94).

■ Significance of [ ] in the F Button Menu

If an F button is assigned a function that is toggled on and off each time the button is touched, the

F button name appears in brackets [ ] when the function is on. When off, the brackets [ ] will disappear.

Operations Common to All Modes

EN-33

Touch the FUNCTION button to display the FUNCTION menu. This menu can be used to access

most of the functions and settings of the Digital Piano.

■ FUNCTION Menu Operation Example

As an example, this section describes how to change the “Hammer Response” setting.

Touch the FUNCTION button.

The FUNCTION menu appears.

Use the touch ring to select “KEYBOARD” > “KBD SETTING” > “Hammer

Response”, in that order.

• In this manual, menu operations are written as shown above. Specific operations are as follows.

(1) Trace the touch ring to move the cursor ( ) to “KEYBOARD”, and then touch the ENTER

button.

Using the FUNCTION Menu

Operations Common to All Modes

EN-34

(2) Trace the touch ring to move the cursor ( ) to “KBD SETTING”, and then touch the ENTER

button.

(3) Move the cursor ( ) to “Hammer Response” by touching the top or bottom of the touch ring.

(This time, it is not necessary to touch the ENTER button.)

Change the value.

• Touch the left or right or trace along the touch ring.

• You can also touch the ENTER button to display the value list screen and change the value

there.

• While touching and holding the FUNCTION button, touching the top, bottom, left, or right of the

touch ring will return it to the initial default value.

• In the FUNCTION menu, each touch of the EXIT button moves one level up from the currently

displayed level. Touch and hold the EXIT button to return to the top screen from any level.

• For details on all FUNCTION menu items, see “FUNCTION Menu Items” (page EN-176).

Operations Common to All Modes

EN-35

Use the procedure below when you need to change the name of Registration Bank (page EN-88),

F Button Set (page EN-100), data saved on a USB flash drive or to input or edit other text (page

EN-143).

• USB flash drive (page EN-138) file names can be up to 231 characters long.

• Up to 8 characters can appear on the display at a time.

■ To change a character

Touch the left or right of the touch ring on the text editing screen to move the

cursor to the character you want to change.

Trace the touch ring to change the character.

• Touching the F3 button (A/a) switches between uppercase and lowercase letters when the

cursor is located at a letter of the alphabet. When the cursor is located at a number or symbol, it

switches to “A”.

• Touching the F4 button (123/#) switches between numbers and symbols when the cursor is

located at a number or symbol. If the cursor is located at a letter of the alphabet, it switches to

“0”.

• The characters that can be used in the names of F Button Sets and Registration Banks are

listed in the table below.

Text Character Input

Cursor (flashing)

(First cell in the above table is blank.)

;

{

(

}

)

[

]

Operations Common to All Modes

EN-36

• The characters shown in the table below are supported for file names on an exFAT formatted

USB flash drive.

• The characters shown in the table below are supported for file names on a FAT 32 formatted

USB flash drive.

Repeat steps 1 and 2 as many times as necessary.

■ To insert a character

Touch the left or right of the touch ring on the text editing screen to move the

cursor to the position where you want to insert characters.

• To insert a character at the end of a string (append), move the cursor to the rightmost character

and then touch the right of the touch ring again.

Touch the F2 button (INS).

An “A” is inserted at the cursor position.

• In this state, the inserted “A” can be changed to another character. Perform Step 2 onward of

“To change a character” above.

■ To delete a character

Touch the left or right of the touch ring on the text editing screen to move the

cursor to the character you want to delete.

Touch the F1 button (DEL).

(First cell in the above table is blank.)

[

]

(

)

{

}

;

)

{

}

(

Operations Common to All Modes

EN-37

■ To save edited text

Touch the ENTER button on the text editing screen.

A confirmation screen appears. To return to the text editing screen and continue editing, touch the

left (NO) of the touch ring.

To save your edits, touch the right (YES) of the touch ring.

“Complete” appears, and the display returns to the screen that preceded the text editing screen.

■ To discard edited text

Touch the EXIT button on the text editing screen.

A confirmation screen appears. To return to the text editing screen and continue editing, touch the

left (NO) of the touch ring.

To discard the edits, touch the right (YES) of the touch ring.

Returns to the screen used before editing started.

EN-38

You can select the acoustic settings appropriate for the Digital Piano’s location.

Select “04 Listening” of the F Button Set. See “To change the F Button Set” (page

EN-32).

Touch the F3 button (PPOSI).

The “PIANO POSITION” screen appears.

Trace the touch ring to select the setting that fits the location of the Digital Piano.

Select a setting you like in accordance with the Digital Piano’s actual positioning.

Acoustic Settings for the Digital Piano and

Playback of the Demo Songs

Selecting the Piano Position Setting

Setting value Description

Standard

Standard setting when the Digital Piano is on a stand and is against (or near) a

wall.

Wall Assumed when the back of this Digital Piano is against a wall.

Center Assumed when this Digital Piano is in the center of a room.

Table Standard setting when the Digital Piano is placed on top of a table.

Acoustic Settings for the Digital Piano and Playback of the Demo Songs

EN-39

Follow the steps below to play back the built-in demo songs in sequence.

Select the “01 Standard” of the F button set. See “To change the F Button Set”

(page EN-32).

Touch the F1 button (DEMO).

The a button flashes and the demo song is waiting to start.

To select a song, trace the touch ring.

• You can also select a song as follows.

(1) Touch the ENTER button to display the song list screen.

(2) Trace the touch ring or touch the top or bottom of the touch ring to move the cursor to the song

you want to select.

(3) Touch the EXIT button to return to the screen displayed in step 2.

• The steps to select a song can also be performed during demo song playback.

Listening to the Demo Songs

Acoustic Settings for the Digital Piano and Playback of the Demo Songs

EN-40

To start the demo song, touch the a button.

• Each time the a button is touched after this, the demo song is stopped or resumed.

To return to the top screen, touch the EXIT button.

• If Auto Power Off (page EN-17) is enabled, power will turn off automatically at the applicable trigger

time after a period of non-use, even if a demo song is being played back.

• You can play along with the demo song on the keyboard. The keyboard tone will be the melody tone

of the song being played (the tone cannot be changed).

• During the demo song, the following functions are assigned to the CONTROL button, and K1 and

K2 knobs, respectively (the functions cannot be changed).

CONTROL button: Modulation

K1 knob: Cutoff Freq.

K2 knob: Resonance

EN-41

This Digital Piano has many tones available. Choose your favorite tone and play it.

• For details about tone categories and the names of tones included in each category, refer to the

separate “Built-in Music Data Lists”.

Touch the top or bottom of the touch ring on the top screen to move the cursor

( ) to the part name and tone number.

• When “U1” is displayed as the part name, the tone of the “Upper 1” part sounds when you play a

keyboard key. For more information about parts, see “Sounding Two Different Tones at the

Same Time (Layer)” (page EN-44) and “Splitting the Keyboard Between Two Tones (Split)”

(page EN-46).

Trace the touch ring.

Tones are switched in numerical order.

When the desired tone name appears, take your finger off the touch ring.

Playing Notes with Different Tones

Selecting a Single Tone

Selecting a Tone by Number

Part name: U1 (Upper 1)

Tone number

Playing Notes with Different Tones

EN-42

Touch the top or bottom of the touch ring on the top screen to move the cursor

( ) to the part name and tone number.

Touch the ENTER button.

A list of tone category names is displayed.

Use the touch ring to select a tone category then touch the ENTER button.

A list of tone names is displayed.

Use the touch ring to select a tone.

After selecting the desired tone, touch and hold the EXIT button.

Return to the top screen.

With each touch of the tone buttons, the first tone of each tone category is selected in turn.

Selecting a Tone by Category

Selecting a Tone with the Touch Buttons

Playing Notes with Different Tones

EN-43

Select the “07 Piano Collect” or “08 E.PianoCollect” of the F button set. See “To

change the F Button Set” (page EN-32).

Touch one of the F1 to F4 buttons, to select the tone you want.

• The tones in the table below can be selected with a single touch.

• You can assign your own favorite tones to each F button using the F button set for which functions

have not yet been assigned. For more information, see “Using the F Button Set” (page EN-94).

The built-in guitar and bass tones may contain strum noise, ghost notes, or other sound effects

depending on the sound (pitch and intensity). For more information, refer to the separate “Built-in Music

Data Lists”.

Selecting a Tone with the F Buttons

07 Piano Collect 08 E.PianoCollect

F1 button 001 Privia GRAND 018 SPACE BOY EP

F2 button 004 STAGE PIANO 019 JUST THE WAY EP

F3 button 005 BALLAD PIANO 023 INDESTRUCTIBLE EP

F4 button 009 COOL GRAND 024 WHERE IT IS EP

Guitar and Bass Tones

Playing Notes with Different Tones

EN-44

As shown in the figure below, by assigning different tones to the “Upper 1” and “Upper 2” parts, two

tones can be played simultaneously when the keyboard is played. This feature is called “Layer”. When

Layer is turned on, both the Upper 1 and Upper 2 parts sound simultaneously.

* For details on Split, see “Splitting the Keyboard Between Two Tones (Split)” (page EN-46).

• If you play the keyboard when both Layer and Split are off, only the Upper 1 part will sound.

Perform the operation described in “Selecting a Single Tone” (page EN-41)

operation to select the Upper 1 tone.

Select the “01 Standard” of the F button set. See “To change the F Button Set”

(page EN-32).

Sounding Two Different Tones at the Same Time (Layer)

Layering Two Tones

Layer: On, Split: Off*

Upper 1

Upper 2

Layer: Off, Split: Off

Upper 1

Playing Notes with Different Tones

EN-45

Touch the F4 button (LAYER).

Layer is turned ON and the indicator appears on the display.

Perform the operation described in “Selecting a Single Tone” (page EN-41)

operation to select the Upper 2 tone.

Select the “01 Standard” of the F button set. See “To change the F Button Set”

(page EN-32).

Touch the F4 button (LAYER) to turn off the indicator on the display.

Unlayering the Keyboard

Part name: U2 (Upper 2)

Displayed when Layer is on

Playing Notes with Different Tones

EN-46

By assigning a “Lower” part to the lower range of the keyboard (as shown in the figure below), the lower

range and upper range of the keyboard can play different tones. This function is called “Split”. With Split

turned on, you can do the following.

• The lower (left side) range of the keyboard sounds the tone of the Lower part while the upper (right

side) range of the keyboard sounds the tone of the Upper 1 part (when Layer is off

• The lower (left side) range of the keyboard sounds the tone of the Lower part while the upper (right

side) range of the keyboard sounds the tone of the Upper 1 and Upper 2 parts (when Layer is on

* For details on layering, see “Sounding Two Different Tones at the Same Time (Layer)” (page EN-44).

Perform the operation described in “Selecting a Single Tone” (page EN-41)

operation to select the upper range tone (Upper 1 tone).

Select the “01 Standard” of the F button set. See “To change the F Button Set”

(page EN-32).

Touch the F3 button (SPLIT).

SPLIT is enabled and the indicator appears on the display.

Splitting the Keyboard Between Two Tones (Split)

Splitting the Keyboard Between Two Different Tones

Lower Upper 1

Lower

Upper 1

Upper 2

Part name: L (Lower)

Displayed when SPLIT is on

Playing Notes with Different Tones

EN-47

Perform the operation described in “Selecting a Single Tone” (page EN-41)

operation to select the lower range tone (Lower tone).

• To use both SPLIT and LAYER at the same time, perform steps 3 to 4 of the above operation

following the operation described in “Layering Two Tones” (page EN-44).

Under initial default settings, the lowest note of the upper range (called the split point) is F{3.

Select the “01 Standard” of the F button set. See “To change the F Button Set”

(page EN-32).

Touch and hold the F3 button (SPLIT).

The “SPLIT POINT” screen appears.

Press the keyboard key you want to be the split point (lowest note of the upper

range).

The note of the split point is changed to that of the key pressed.

• You can also change the split point using the touch ring or touching the ENTER button to

display a list of note names.

Touch the EXIT button to exit the setup.

Select the “01 Standard” of the F button set. See “To change the F Button Set”

(page EN-32).

Touch the F3 button (SPLIT) to turn off the indicator on the display.

Changing the Split Point

Unsplitting the Keyboard

Split point note

Playing Notes with Different Tones

EN-48

You can change the volume, octave shift, tuning, and other settings for the Upper 1 and Upper 2 parts

when using Layer (page EN-44), and the Lower part when using Split (page EN-46), individually for

each part. For more information, see the references in the table below.

Changing Part Settings (Volume Level, Octave Shift,

Tuning, etc.)

Configuration items Reference

Volume of each part, stereo pan, Hall

Simulator/Reverb, Chorus

“Using the Mixer” (page EN-65)

Octave shift for each part “Changing the Pitch in Octave Units (Octave Shift)”

(page EN-132)

Fine tuning of each part “Adjusting the Tuning Separately for Each Part

(Upper 1/Upper 2/Lower) (Part Fine Tune)”

(page EN-131)

Enable/disable pedal operation for each part “Enabling/Disabling the Pedal Operation for Each

Part (Upper 1/Upper 2/Lower)” (page EN-71)

Enable/disable pitch bend wheel operation for

each part

“Enabling/Disabling the Pitch Bend Wheel Operation

for Each Part (Upper 1/Upper 2/Lower)”

(page EN-80)

EN-49

The “Sound Mode” of this Digital Piano includes the following effects.

• Hall Simulator/Reverb

Hall Simulator and Reverb are both effects that change the reverberation of the sound.

• Surround

A surround effect (an effect that adds breadth to the sound) is applied to the sound output from the

built-in speakers.

• The Surround effect is not applied to the output from the Digital Piano’s PHONES jacks or LINE

OUT R, L/MONO jacks.

Under initial default settings, the Hall Simulator/Reverb is on and Surround is off. Each can be turned

on and off as follows.

Select the “04 Listening” of the F button set. See “To change the F Button Set”

(page EN-32).

Touch the F2 button (SMODE).

The “Sound Mode” screen appears.

Touch the top or bottom of the touch ring to change the setting value.

Applying Effects

Using the Sound Mode Effects (Hall Simulator/Reverb

and Surround)

Hall Simulator

The hall simulator effect simulates the rich clarity, unconstrained brilliance,

and other distinctive acoustic characteristics of world-famous concert halls

and structures.

Reverb Reverb simulates ambient spaces, such as a room or hall.

Enabling or Disabling the Hall Simulator/Reverb and Surround Effects

Setting value Description

Off Disables both effects

Hall/Rev. Enables Hall Simulator/Reverb only

Surround Enables Surround only

Hall/Rev. + Srnd Enables both effects

Applying Effects

EN-50

Before selecting a Hall Simulator/Reverb type, make sure to enable the Hall Simulator/Reverb. For

details, see “Enabling or Disabling the Hall Simulator/Reverb and Surround Effects” (page EN-49).

• The “SOUND MODE” screen shown in step 2 can also be displayed by touch and hold the F button

to which “SMODE” is assigned.

Touch the FUNCTION button to display the FUNCTION menu.

Use the touch ring to select “SOUND” > “SOUND MODE” > “Hall/Rev. Type”.

Trace the touch ring to change the setting value.

Specifying the Hall Simulator/Reverb Type

Setting value Description

Tone The type is automatically set to match the selected tone.

Salon

N.Y. Club

Scoring Stage

Opera Hall

Viennese Hall

L.A. Hall

Berlin Hall

BritishStadium

Various types of hall simulator. For example, “N.Y. Club” simulates

the acoustics of a music club in Manhattan, while “Berlin Hall”

simulates a classical arena-style concert hall in Berlin.

Room 1

Room 2

Room 3

Large Room

Simulates the reverberation of a room.

Hall 1

Hall 2

Hall 3

Simulates the reverberation of a small hall.

Stadium Simulates the reverberation of a stadium.

Applying Effects

EN-51

The mixer can be used to individually adjust the Hall Simulator/Reverb for each part (Upper 1/Upper 2/

Lower), audio input from the MIC IN jack, etc. For more information, see “Using the Mixer” (page

EN-65).

Before selecting the Surround type, make sure to enable Surround. For details, see “Enabling or

Disabling the Hall Simulator/Reverb and Surround Effects” (page EN-49).

• The “SOUND MODE” screen shown in step 2 can also be displayed by touch and hold the F button

to which “SMODE” is assigned.

Touch the FUNCTION button to display the FUNCTION menu.

Use the touch ring to select “SOUND” > “SOUND MODE” > “Surund Type”.

Trace the touch ring to change the desired setting value.

• You can choose from Type 1 (small effect), Type 2 (medium effect), and Type 3 (large effect).

* Depending on the tone selected and the characteristics of the audio being played back, the

effect may not be obvious.

Adjusting the Depth of the Hall Simulator/Reverb Effect

Specifying the Surround Type

Applying Effects

EN-52

The Digital Piano’s DSP (Digital Signal Processor) can be used to apply various effects to the built-in

tones. Effects include equalizer, tremolo, limiter, wah-wah, among others.

Preset DSPs

This Digital Piano is equipped with 100 preset DSP effects. These effects can be applied to any of the

built-in tones, and the effect settings adjusted as you like.

DSP Tones

DSP effects can be switched ON (enabled) or OFF (disabled) for each tone. Some DSP effects are

preset to ON or OFF depending on the built-in tone. For tones that use DSP effects, a preset

appropriate for the tone is assigned as the default DSP. This is called a “DSP tone.”

• To check whether a particular tone is a DSP tone, refer to “Tone Lists” in the separate “Built-in Music

Data Lists”.

Perform the operation described in “Selecting a Single Tone” (page EN-41)

operation to select a tone.

Select the “10 Effect” F button set. See “To change the F Button Set” (page

EN-32).

Touch the F4 button (DSP).

DSP is enabled and the F button menu F4 appears enclosed in brackets [ ].

To disable DSP, touch the F4 button (DSP). The enclosing brackets [ ] disappear.

Using DSP Effects

Enabling or Disabling DSP

Displayed when DSP is enabled

Applying Effects

EN-53

To quickly switch the DSP effect type applied to a tone, select one of the “Preset DSPs” (DSP type

numbers 001 to 100) using the following operation:

Perform the operation described in “Selecting a Single Tone” (page EN-41)

operation to select a tone.

Select the “10 Effect” F button set. See “To change the F Button Set” (page

EN-32).

Touch and hold the F4 button (DSP).

The “DSP” screen appears.

Touch the ENTER button to display the “DSP TYPE” screen.

Use the touch ring to select the type of DSP you want.

• “000 Tone” is the default DSP type for each tone.

• “001 Mono 1BandEQ” and after are “Preset DSPs” with their own names, such as equalizer or

compressor. See “Preset DSP List” (page EN-184) for details on the name and configuration of

each preset DSP.

The DSP of this Digital Piano consists of up to four modules (M1–M4) as shown in the figures below.

• In the case of a single module:

• In the case of four modules:

• Each module can contain various effects (equalizer, tremolo, compressor, etc.).

• Each DSP type has a specific module configuration (number of modules and effects inside). For

more information, see “Preset DSP List” (page EN-184).

When changing the DSP settings, adjust the parameters of the effects contained in each module.

Selecting a DSP Type

Configuring DSP Settings

OutputSound Source

M1 M2 M3 M4

OutputSound Source

Applying Effects

EN-54

■ To change DSP settings

Use the “DSP” screen to change DSP settings.

• Note that any changes you make to DSP settings are cleared whenever you change the tone

or turn off Digital Piano power. If you want to retain DSP changes you make, use the

registration function (page EN-86) to save the setup so you can recall it later.

Perform the operation described in “Selecting a Single Tone” (page EN-41)

operation to select a tone.

• If you want to change the default DSP of a DSP tone (page EN-52), select the DSP tone here.

Select the “10 Effect” F button set. See “To change the F Button Set” (page

EN-32).

Touch and hold the F4 button (DSP).

The “DSP” screen appears.

Touch the ENTER button to display the “DSP TYPE” screen.

Use the touch ring to select the type of DSP for which you want to change the

settings.

• If you want to change the default DSP settings of the tone you selected in step 1, select “000

Tone”.

• If you want to change settings of a preset DSP that is applied to the tone you selected in step 1,

select one from “001 Mono 1BandEQ” to “100 Stereo IR+EQ”.

• After making your selection, touch the EXIT button to return to the “DSP” screen.

Applying Effects

EN-55

If DSP ON/OFF:OFF is displayed, switch it to ON by the following operation.

(1) Use the touch ring to select “DSP ON/OFF:OFF” and touch the ENTER button.

(2) Use the touch ring to set the value to “On”.

(3) Touch the EXIT button to return to the “DSP” screen.

Use the touch ring to select the module (from “M1” to “M4”) whose settings you

want to change, and touch the ENTER button.

A list of parameters for the effect in the selected module is displayed.

• “Bypass” is common to all modules. Set to “On” if you do not want to use the effect in the

currently displayed module. For more information, see “About Bypass” (page EN-56).

Change the parameter settings.

(1) Touch the top or bottom of the touch ring to select the parameter you want to change.

(2) Use the touch ring to change the value of the selected parameter.

For parameters and values, see “Parameter List of DSP Module Effects” (page EN-189).

(3) Repeat steps (1) and (2) as many times as necessary.

(4) Touch the EXIT button to return to the “DSP” screen.

If necessary, adjust other parameters in the other modules in the same way

following steps 7 to 8.

10.

When all necessary settings have been made, touch and hold the EXIT button to

return to the top screen.

11.

If you want to save the modified settings, follow the operation described in

“Saving a Setup Registration” (page EN-87) to save the registration.

Applying Effects

EN-56

■ About Bypass

All modules contain a “Bypass” parameter. When set to “Off” (default), the effects in that module are

enabled. When set to “On”, the module is “bypassed” from the line connecting the sound source to the

output, disabling the effects in the module.

If there is a module with unnecessary effects in a DSP consisting of multiple modules, set “Bypass” to

“On” for that module.

Module

Bypass: Off

Module

Bypass: On

Output

Sound Source

Applying Effects

EN-57

The chorus effect thickens the sound.

This Digital Piano has a preset chorus effect assigned to each tone, but you can select a different type

by following the operation below.

Select the “09 Favorite Piano” of the F button set. See “To change the F Button

Set” (page EN-32).

Touch the F2 button (EFECT).

The “EFFECT” screen appears.

• Check that the cursor ( ) is on the “Chorus Type”.

Change the value of the “Chorus Type” setting.

• Use the touch ring to change the desired setting value.

The mixer can be used to adjust the chorus applied to each part (Upper 1/Upper 2/Lower) separately.

For more information, see “Using the Mixer” (page EN-65).

Using Chorus (Chorus, Flanger, Short Delay)

Changing the Chorus Type

Setting value Description

Tone The chorus type is automatically set to match the selected tone.

Chorus 1 to 4 Four chorus types with different characteristics.

FB Chorus Chorus with feedback.

Deep Chorus Chorus with the deepest, thickest sound.

Flanger 1 to 4

Four types of flanger with different sound undulations and

fluctuations.

Short Delay 1, 2 Short delay. There are two types to choose from.

Adjusting the Depth of the Chorus Effect

Applying Effects

EN-58

Brilliance is an effect that adjusts the brightness of a sound.

• The brilliance effect is applied to the entire sound output from the Digital Piano.

Select the “09 Favorite Piano” of the F button set. See “To change the F Button

Set” (page EN-32).

Touch the F2 button (EFECT).

The “EFFECT” screen appears.

Touch the top or bottom of the touch ring to select “Brilliance”.

Change the “Brilliance” setting.

• Use the touch ring to change the desired setting.

• You can adjust the setting between –12 and +12. When +1 or higher, the sound is brighter;

when –1 or lower, the sound is darker.

Adjusting Brilliance

Applying Effects

EN-59

The piano tones of this Digital Piano include elements characteristic of the sound of an acoustic piano.

Follow the procedure below to adjust them.

Select the “09 Favorite Piano” of the F button set. See “To change the F Button

Set” (page EN-32).

Touch the F1 button (ACSIM).

The “ACOUSTIC SIM.” screen will appear.

Touch the top or bottom of the touch ring to select the item whose settings you

want to change.

• For more information on each setting item, see “List of Acoustic Piano Sound Setting Items”

(page EN-60).

Changes the setting value of the selected item.

• The setting value of each item can be changed within the following range.

• Trace the touch ring to change the desired setting value.

Repeat steps 3 and 4 as necessary.

Adjusting Acoustic Piano Sound Characteristics

(Acoustic Simulator)

Setting value Description

Tone A value appropriate for the selected tone is automatically set.

Off Turn off the effect.

1 to 10 The higher the number, the stronger the effect.

Applying Effects

EN-60

List of Acoustic Piano Sound Setting Items

Setting Items Description

String Reso.

String Resonance. Playing on an acoustic piano causes the strings

that are harmonics of the played strings to resonate. You can use this

setting item to adjust the level of resonance.

Damper Reso.

Damper Resonance. Pressing the damper pedal on an acoustic

piano opens all the strings of 88 keys, causing all of the strings that

are harmonics of the keys that are played to resonate. You can use

this setting item to adjust the level of resonance.

Damper Noise

Damper Noise. Damper noise is a slight metallic ringing sound that is

generated as the damper of an acoustic piano separates from the

strings when the damper pedal is pressed. You can use this setting

item to adjust the volume level of the noise.

Key On Noise

Key On Action Noise. When the keys of an acoustic piano are tapped

with extremely light pressure, piano mechanism operation sound

(noise) is produced without the hammers reaching the strings. You

can use this setting item to adjust the volume level of the noise.

Key Off Noise

Key Off Action Noise. Releasing the keyboard keys of acoustic piano

generates piano mechanism operation sound (noise). You can use

this setting item to adjust the volume level of the noise.

Applying Effects

EN-61

Various effects can be applied to the audio from a microphone connected to the MIC IN jack. In

addition to the 25 preset types, you can change the effect settings to your liking.

• You can also adjust settings for the volume, stereo pan, and Hall Simulator/Reverb applied to audio

input from the MIC IN jack. For more information, see “Using the Mixer” (page EN-65).

Select the “05 Song Play” of the F button set. See “To change the F Button Set”

(page EN-32).

Touch the F4 button (MICFX).

The microphone effect is enabled and the F button menu F4 appears enclosed in brackets [ ].

To disable the microphone effect, touch the F4 button (MICFX). The enclosing

brackets [ ] disappear.

Using Microphone Effects

Enabling or Disabling the Microphone Effect

Displayed when the microphone effect is enabled

Applying Effects

EN-62

Select the “05 Song Play” of the F button set. See “To change the F Button Set”

(page EN-32).

Touch and hold the F4 button (MICFX).

The “MIC FX” screen appears.

Touch the ENTER button to display the “MIC FX TYPE” screen.

Use the touch ring to select the type of microphone effect.

• There are 25 effect types to choose from. For more information, see “Microphone Effect Type

List” (page EN-226).

Specifying the Microphone Effect Type

Applying Effects

EN-63

The microphone effect is made up of three modules (M1 to M3) as shown in the figure below.

• Each module contains different effects (equalizer, delay, limiter, etc.).

• Each type of microphone effect has a specific set of effects in each module. For more information,

see “Microphone Effect Type List” (page EN-226).

To change microphone effect settings, adjust the parameters of the effect inside each module.

• Settings changed by the following operations will be erased when the Digital Piano is turned

off. If you want to save the modified settings, use the registration function (page EN-86) to

save them.

Select the “05 Song Play” of the F button set. See “To change the F Button Set”

(page EN-32).

Touch and hold the F4 button (MICFX).

The “MIC FX” screen appears.

Touch the ENTER button to display the “MIC FX TYPE” screen.

Use the touch ring to select the type of microphone effect for which you want to

change the settings.

• After making your selection, touch the EXIT button to return to the “MIC FX” screen.

If “FX ON/OFF:OFF” is displayed, switch it to ON by the following operation.

(1) Use the touch ring to select “FX ON/OFF:OFF” and touch the ENTER button.

(2) Use the touch ring to set the value to “On”.

(3) Touch the EXIT button to return to the “MIC FX” screen.

Changing Microphone Effect Settings

M1 M2 M3

Output Sound Source

Applying Effects

EN-64

Use the touch ring to select the module (from “M1” to “M3”) whose settings you

want to change, and touch the ENTER button.

A list of parameters for the effect in the selected module is displayed.

• “Bypass” is common to all modules. Set to “On” if you do not want to use the effect in the

currently displayed module.

Change the parameter settings.

(1) Touch the top or bottom of the touch ring to select the parameter you want to change.

(2) Use the touch ring to change the value of the selected parameter.

For parameters and values, see “Parameter List of Module Effects” (page EN-228).

(3) Repeat steps (1) and (2) as many times as necessary.

(4) Touch the EXIT button to return to the “MIC FX” screen.

If necessary, adjust other parameters in the other modules in the same way

following steps 6 to 7.

When all necessary settings have been made, touch and hold the EXIT button to

return to the top screen.

10.

If you want to save the modified settings, follow the operation described in

“Saving a Setup Registration” (page EN-87) to save the registration.

EN-65

The mixer allows you to individually adjust the volume, stereo pan, and effects for each part (Upper 1/

Upper 2/Lower) and audio input from the MIC IN jack.

Select the “04 Listening” of the F button set. See “To change the F Button Set”

(page EN-32).

Touch the F4 button (MIXER).

The “MIXER” screen appears. This screen contains four parameter categories.

VOLUME: Adjust volume

PAN: Adjust stereo pan (pan)

HALL/REV.: Adjust the depth of the Hall Simulator/Reverb effect

CHORUS: Adjust the depth of the chorus effect

Use the touch ring to select the parameter category you want to adjust then

touch the ENTER button.

• For example, if you select “VOLUME” and touch the ENTER button, the following screen will

appear.

Touch the top or bottom of the touch ring to select the item whose value you

want to change.

Change the value of the selected item.

• Trace the touch ring to change the value.

• For more information on items and values, see “List of Mixer Setting Items” (page EN-66).

When done, touch the EXIT button to return to the “MIXER” screen.

Repeat steps 3 to 6 as necessary.

Using the Mixer

Adjusting the Volume Level, Stereo Pan and Effects for

Each Part

Using the Mixer

EN-66

List of Mixer Setting Items

Parameter

Category

Setting items Description Range of values

VOLUME

KB Group

Adjusts the overall volume of the Upper 1,

Upper 2, and Lower parts while maintaining

their relative volumes.

000 to 127

U1 Part

U2 Part

L Part

Adjusts the individual volume of the Upper 1,

Upper 2, and Lower parts.

Audio Song

Adjusts the volume of audio data played in

SONG mode (page EN-106).

Wireless Audio

Adjusts the volume of input audio from

wirelessly connected external devices.

Mic In

Adjusts the volume of the input audio from

the MIC IN jack.

MIDI Song

Adjusts the volume of MIDI data played in

SONG mode (page EN-106).

PAN

U1 Part

U2 Part

L Part

Adjusts the stereo pan of the Upper 1,

Upper 2, and Lower parts.

–64 to 00 to +63

–64: Left-most

00: Central

+63: Right-most

Mic In

Adjusts the stereo pan of input audio from

the MIC IN jack.

HALL/REV.

Hall/Rev. Return

Adjusts the overall depth (Return value)

while maintaining the balance of the

currently set Hall Simulator/Reverb depth

(Send value) for each part of the following

items (U1 Part Send - Mic In Send).

000 to 127

U1 Part Send

U2 Part Send

L Part Send

Adjusts the Send value to the Hall Simulator/

Reverb for the Upper 1, Upper 2, and Lower

parts.

AudioSongSend

Adjusts the Send value to the Hall Simulator/

Reverb for audio data played in SONG mode

(page EN-106).

Wireless A Send

Adjusts the Send value of input audio from a

wirelessly connected external device to the

Hall Simulator/Reverb.

Mic In Send

Adjusts the Send value of the input audio

from the MIC IN jack to the Hall Simulator/

Reverb.

CHORUS

U1 Part Send

U2 Part Send

L Part Send

Adjusts the Send value to the chorus for the

Upper 1, Upper 2, and Lower parts.

000 to 127

EN-67

This Digital Piano is equipped with two jacks for pedal connections. Pedals can be connected to both

jacks and used at the same time.

Use the PEDAL UNIT jack to connect a separately available pedal unit. You can then use the pedals

for expression that is similar to that available on an acoustic piano.

Damper Pedal

Pressing the damper pedal while playing will cause the notes you play to be sustained.

• When Grand Piano is selected as the tone, using this pedal generates harmonic and other

resonance, just like the damper pedal on an acoustic grand piano. The strength of the pedal’s effect

varies continuously with the depth to which you depress the pedal.

Soft Pedal

Pressing this pedal while playing suppresses notes played on the keyboard after the pedal was

pressed, and makes them sound softer.

Sostenuto Pedal

Only the notes of the keys that are depressed when this pedal is pressed are sustained, even if the

keyboard keys are released, until the pedal is released.

Changing the Sound During a Performance

Using Pedals

Jack Connectable Pedal

PEDAL UNIT

Separately available pedal unit

(three pedals: damper, soft, and sostenuto)

EXPRESSION/ASSIGNABLE

Commercially available expression pedal, the included sustain pedal

(SP-3), separately available sustain pedal

PEDAL UNIT jack

Soft Pedal

Damper Pedal

Sostenuto Pedal

Changing the Sound During a Performance

EN-68

Use the EXPRESSION/ASSIGNABLE jack to connect the included sustain pedal (SP-3), a

commercially available expression pedal or a separately available sustain pedal.

■ Connectable Expression Pedals

• Maximum resistance value: 10kΩ±20% to 50kΩ±20%

• Use of a pedal whose operation has been confirmed (see below) is recommended.

Operation Confirmed Pedals (Polarity Type 2

)

Roland EV-5 (Set minimum volume to 0.)

KURZWEIL CC-1

FATAR VP-25, VP-26

* Use the procedure under “To specify the pedal type” (page EN-68) to select “Exp.Type2”.

■ To specify the pedal type

Select the “13 KB Setting” of the F button set. See “To change the F Button Set”

(page EN-32).

Touch the F3 button (PEDAL).

The “EXP/ASGN. PEDAL” screen appears.

• Confirm that the cursor ( ) is on “Pedal Type”.

Use the touch ring to change the desired setting.

• The polarity of expression pedals varies by manufacturer. When connecting an expression

pedal, select “Exp.Type1” or “Exp.Type2” according to the polarity of the pedal.

EXPRESSION/ASSIGNABLE jack

Setting value Description

Exp.Type1

Polarity Type 1 (see the illustration below) expression pedal

Exp.Type2

Polarity Type 2 (see the illustration below) expression pedal

The included sustain pedal (SP-3) or a separately available sustain

pedal

Changing the Sound During a Performance

EN-69

■ To specify the pedal function

Display the “EXP/ASGN. PEDAL” screen by performing the procedure under “To specify the pedal

type” (page EN-68) and change the value of the “Pedal Target” setting. The following setting values are

for the expression pedal only: “Expression”, “Master Vol”, “Tempo”, and “LY Balance”.

• The “EXP/ASGN. PEDAL” screen can also be displayed by touching and holding the FUNCTION

button and depressing a pedal connected to the EXPRESSION/ASSIGNABLE jack (if the

connected pedal matches the currently selected pedal type).

Setting value Description

Expression Controls Expression (MIDI Control Change 11).

Master Vol Controls overall Digital Piano volume level.

Tempo Controls tempo.

LY Balance Controls Upper 1 part and Upper 2 part volume level balance.

Damper

Sustains notes played while the pedal is depressed, even if the keys

are subsequently released. Organ and other tones that are sustained

as long as keys are depressed continue to sound as long as the

pedal is depressed.

Sostenuto

Sustains only the notes of the keys that are depressed when the

pedal is pressed until the pedal is released, even if the keyboard keys

are released first.

Soft

While the pedal is depressed, slightly lowers the volume of notes

played and also softens them.

Arpeggio Hold

When the Arpeggiator (page EN-84) is enabled, Arpeggio Hold can

be enabled or disabled when the pedal is depressed.

Start/Stop Performs the same operations as the a button.

Seq Recall Inc

Seq Recall Dec

Each press of a pedal scrolls through and selects setups you

registered with the registration function. For more information, see

“Using a Pedal to Cycle Through Multiple Setup Registrations

(Sequential Recall)” (page EN-91).

Changing the Sound During a Performance

EN-70

■ Expression Pedal Calibration

When connecting an expression pedal to the EXPRESSION/ASSIGNABLE jack for the first time,

perform calibration (adjustment) as follows.

Connect an expression pedal to the EXPRESSION/ASSIGNABLE jack.

Select the “13 KB Setting” of the F button set. See “To change the F Button Set”

(page EN-32).

Touch the F3 button (PEDAL).

The “EXP/ASGN. PEDAL” screen appears.

Touch the top or bottom of the touch ring to select “Exp Calibration” then touch

the ENTER button.

A confirmation screen will appear. To cancel the operation, touch the left (NO) of the touch ring.

To start calibration, touch the right (YES) of the touch ring.

When “Highest” is displayed, press the toe end of the pedal down as far as it will

go, then touch the ENTER button.

When “Lowest” is displayed, press the heel end of the pedal down as far as it will

go, then touch the ENTER button.

When calibration has successfully completed, “Complete” is displayed.

Changing the Sound During a Performance

EN-71

Touch the FUNCTION button to display the FUNCTION menu.

Use the touch ring to select “PEDAL/WHEEL” then touch the ENTER button.

Select from the menu the jack to which the pedal whose settings you want to

change is connected.

• To change the settings of the pedal connected to the PEDAL UNIT jack:

Use the touch ring to select “PEDAL UNIT” then touch the ENTER button.

• To change the settings of the pedal connected to the EXPRESSION/ASSIGNABLE jack:

Use the touch ring to select “EXP/ASGN. PEDAL” then touch the ENTER button.

Touch the top or bottom of the touch ring to select “Upper 1 Part”, “Upper 2

Part”, or “Lower Part”

Use the touch ring to change the desired setting.

• Select “On” to enable pedal operation for the part selected in step 4 or “Off” to disable it.

Repeat steps 4 and 5 as necessary.

Enabling/Disabling the Pedal Operation for Each Part (Upper 1/Upper 2/

Lower)

Changing the Sound During a Performance

EN-72

The two knobs are used by assigning different functions to each. Assignable functions include

modifying tones, adjusting effects, or controlling the volume of specific parts. By turning the knobs, the

parameter values of the assigned functions can be changed in real time while playing.

Under initial default settings, the functions that modifies the frequency characteristics of your

performance sound are assigned to each of the knobs as follows: K1 knob: Cutoff Freq., K2 knob:

Resonance. The operation below shows an example of knob usage under initial default settings.

Rotate the K1 knob.

This temporarily displays the function name “CUTOFF FREQ.” that is currently assigned to the K1

knob. The parameter value changes in accordance with the position of the K1 knob.

Rotate the K2 knob.

This temporarily displays the function name “RESONANCE” that is currently assigned to the K2

knob. The parameter value changes in accordance with the position of the K2 knob.

Using the Knobs

Using the Knobs to Change Parameters

Changing the Sound During a Performance

EN-73

Select the “12 Control” F button set. See “To change the F Button Set” (page

EN-32).

Touch the F3 button (KNOB).

The “KNOB” screen appears.

Touch the top or bottom of the touch ring to select the item whose setting value

you want to change.

• Select “K1 Assign” to change the function of the K1 knob or “K2 Assign” to change the function

of the K2 knob.

Use the touch ring to select the function you want to assign to the knob.

• For more information, see “List of Assignable Functions to the Knobs” (page EN-74).

Repeat steps 3 and 4 as necessary.

• Instead of steps 1 and 2 above, the “KNOB” screen can also be displayed by rotating the K1 or K2

knob while touching the FUNCTION button. (If the K1 knob is rotated, “K1 Assign” is selected; if

the K2 knob is rotated, “K2 Assign” is selected.)

Changing the Function Assigned to a Knob

Changing the Sound During a Performance

EN-74

■ List of Assignable Functions to the Knobs

Function Category

Description

Cutoff Freq. Knob/CTRL Adjusts timbre by attenuating the components of a note’s

frequency characteristics that are higher than a certain

frequency (cutoff frequency). A larger value specifies a

brighter, harder sound, while a lower value specifies a

mellower, softer sound.

Resonance Knob/CTRL Adjusts the degree to which the gain of the overtone

component is increased near the frequency specified by

“Cutoff Freq.” above. A larger value specifies a more unusual

sound.

Modulation Knob/CTRL Adjusts the level of the modulation effect.

Brilliance Effect Adjusts the brightness of a sound.

Hall/Rev. Send Mixer Adjusts the send value to the Hall Simulator/Reverb for the

Upper 1 part.

Chorus Send Mixer Adjusts the send value to the chorus for the Upper 1 part.

Attack Time Knob/CTRL Adjusts the time after a key is pressed from when the note

starts to sound until it reaches maximum volume. A larger

value specifies a slower attack.

Release Time Knob/CTRL Adjusts how long notes linger after keyboard keys are

released. A larger value specifies a longer release.

Vibrato Rate Knob/CTRL Adjusts the speed of vibrato of a tone.

Vibrato Depth Knob/CTRL Specifies the depth of vibrato of a tone.

Delay Vib Time Knob/CTRL Adjusts the time until the vibrato of the tone starts after a

note is sounded.

Portamento Time Tone Adjusts the duration of the portamento notes.

Layer Balance Mixer Adjusts the Upper 1 part and Upper 2 part volume level

balance.

Upper1 Pan Mixer Adjusts the stereo pan of the Upper 1 part.

Upper2 Fine Tune Tone Adjusts the part fine tune of the Upper 2 part.

Key press

Key release

Note End

Time

A: Attack Time

R: Release Time

Note Volume

Changing the Sound During a Performance

EN-75

*1 This column shows the names of parameters included in the “FREEZE” screen of the registration

function (page EN-90).

*2 The parameters affected by DSP Parameter 1 and DSP Parameter 2 are two parameters that are

automatically selected as being the most applicable to the currently selected DSP. DSP Parameter

1 and DSP Parameter 2 are fixed according to the selected DSP. For example, when preset DSP

“15. Auto Pan” is selected, DSP Parameter 1 is Rate, and DSP Parameter 2 is Manual.

Upper2 Pan Mixer Adjusts the stereo pan of the Upper 2 part.

Lower Volume Mixer Adjusts the volume of the Lower part.

Lower Pan Mixer Adjusts the stereo pan of the Lower part.

KB Hall/Rev. Send Mixer Adjust the send value to the Hall Simulator/Reverb for all the

keyboard parts (Upper 1, Upper 2, and Lower).

KB Chorus Send Mixer Adjust the send value to the chorus for all the keyboard parts

(Upper 1, Upper 2, and Lower).

KB Group Volume Mixer Adjust the group volume level of the keyboard parts

(Upper 1, Upper 2, and Lower).

MIDISongVolume Mixer Adjusts playback volume level of the MIDI song data.

DSP Parameter 1 Tone Adjusts DSP parameters. The target parameters for

adjustment changes in accordance with the DSP type that is

currently selected.

DSP Parameter 2 Tone

WirelesAudioVol Mixer Adjusts the volume of input audio from wirelessly connected

external devices.

Audio Song Vol. Mixer Adjusts playback volume level of the audio song data.

Arpeg Note Len Arpeggiator Adjusts the arpeggiator note lengths.

Upper Pan Bal. Mixer Adjusts the Upper 1 part and Upper 2 part stereo pan

balance.

Off — Disables knob functions.

Function Category

Description

Changing the Sound During a Performance

EN-76

Select the “12 Control” F button set. See “To change the F Button Set” (page

EN-32).

Touch and hold the F3 button (KNOB).

A confirmation screen will appear. To cancel the operation, touch the left of the touch ring (NO) at

this point.

To reset, touch the right of the touch ring (YES).

“Complete” appears, and the display returns to the screen shown in Step 1.

Resetting the Parameters of the Functions Currently Assigned to the Knobs

Changing the Sound During a Performance

EN-77

This button is used to control the sound while playing.

Under initial default settings, modulation is applied while the CONTROL button is held down. By

changing the setting, other functions can be assigned, such as switching portamento (an effect that

smoothly glides between notes) on and off.

Select the “12 Control” of the F button set. See “To change the F Button Set”

(page EN-32).

Touch the F4 button (CTRL).

The “CONTROL” screen appears.

• Confirm that the cursor ( ) is on “Control Assign”.

Use the touch ring to change the setting value.

* A “DSP tone” is a tone that includes a preset DSP effect. Please refer to the separate “Built-in Music

Data Lists” for a list of tones with built-in DSP effects.

The DSP tones that include the rotary effect are organ tones numbered 61, 62, 65, 66, 67, 71, 72, 73,

74, 75, 76, 79, 80, 81.

Using the CONTROL Button

Selecting the Function Assigned to the CONTROL Button

Setting value Description

Modulation Modulation is applied while the CONTROL button is held down.

Portamento

Each press of the CONTROL button toggles the portamento of the

Upper 1 part on/off.

Rotary

When a DSP tone

that uses the rotary effect is selected, each press of

the CONTROL button toggles the rotary speaker setting between Slow

and Fast.

Arpeg Note Len

Each press of the CONTROL button toggles the arpeggiator note

lengths between normal and half.

Changing the Sound During a Performance

EN-78

If “Control Assign” is set to “Modulation”, change the modulation settings as

necessary.

• Touch the top or bottom of the touch ring to set each item, such as “Mod Value”. For more

information, see “To change the Modulation settings” (page EN-78).

• The “CONTROL” screen can also be displayed by pressing the CONTROL button while touching

the FUNCTION button instead of steps 1 and 2 above.

• When “Control Assign” is set to “Portamento”, the duration of the portamento can be changed using

the knob. Assign “Portamento Time” as the function of the knob. For details, see “Changing the

Function Assigned to a Knob” (page EN-73).

■ To change the Modulation settings

The settings shown in the table below, which appear in the “CONTROL” screen of “Selecting the

Function Assigned to the CONTROL Button” (page EN-77), can be used to change the settings when

modulation is assigned to the CONTROL button.

Setting item Values Description

Mod Value 000 to 127 Sets the intensity at which modulation is applied.

Mod Upper1 Part

Mod Upper2 Part

Mod Lower Part

On, Off

Selects whether to apply modulation to the

Upper 1/Upper 2/Lower parts (On) or not (Off).

Changing the Sound During a Performance

EN-79

By moving the pitch bend wheel up and down, the pitch of the currently sounding notes can be

smoothly raised or lowered, producing an effect similar to saxophone or electric guitar pitch bending

techniques.

• The pitch of the sound changes with the amount the wheel is moved.

• Do not touch the wheel when turning on the Digital Piano.

You can adjust the amount of pitch change that happens when the wheel is moved to the upper or

lower limit in semitone steps. For example, when set to “2”, the pitch rises 2 semitones when the wheel

is moved to the upper limit and falls 2 semitones at the lower limit.

Select the “13 KB Setting” of the F button set. See “To change the F Button Set”

(page EN-32).

Touch the F2 button (WHEEL).

The “WHEEL” screen appears.

• Confirm that the cursor ( ) is on “P Bend Range”.

Change the value of the “P Bend Range” setting.

• Set between 0 and 24.

Using the Pitch Bend Wheel

Changing the Pitch Bend Range

Changing the Sound During a Performance

EN-80

Display the “WHEEL” screen by performing the operation under “Changing the Pitch Bend Range”

(page EN-79) then adjust the settings below.

Enabling/Disabling the Pitch Bend Wheel Operation for Each Part (Upper 1/

Upper 2/Lower)

Setting item Values Description

Upper1 Part

Upper2 Part

Lower Part

On, Off

Enables (On) or disables (Off) the pitch bend wheel

operation for the Upper 1/Upper 2/Lower parts.

EN-81

The Digital Piano’s metronome can play a variety of drum patterns in addition to a standard metronome

sound.

While touching the FUNCTION button, touch the a button.

The metronome starts.

• The red and white LEDs to the left of the a button will flash in time with the metronome beat

(first beat: red; remaining beats: white).

To stop the metronome, while touching the FUNCTION button touch the a

button.

Select the “01 Standard” of the F Button Set. See “To change the F Button Set”

(page EN-32).

Touch the F2 button (METRO).

The “METRONOME” screen appears.

Touch the top or bottom of the touch ring to select the setting you want to

change.

• The table below shows the available settings and values.

• The Tempo setting and Tempo Mark setting are linked to each other.

Using the Metronome

Starting or Stopping the Metronome

Changing the Metronome Settings (Tempo, Beat, Pattern, etc.)

Setting item Setting value and description

Tempo Sets the tempo between 20 and 255 (BPM).

Tempo Mark

Sets the tempo from a tempo marking such as “Andante” or “Allegro”.

For more information, see “Tempo Markings” (page EN-82).

Guide Type

Choose from one of the following:

Metronome: Plays a metronome tone.

Drum: Plays a drum pattern.

Using the Metronome

EN-82

Change the value of the selected setting.

• Trace the touch ring to change the desired setting.

Repeat Steps 3 and 4 as necessary.

■ Tempo Markings

Pattern

If “Guide Type” is “Metronome”:

Sets the metronome’s beat.

If the “Guide Type” is “Drum”:

You can choose any pattern from the list of drum patterns displayed.

For more information, see “Drum Pattern List” (page EN-83).

Volume

Sets the metronome volume relative to the overall volume of the

Digital Piano as a number between 0 (silent) and 127 (maximum

volume).

While Playing

Sets whether the metronome will play a sound (On) or not (Off)

during playback of MIDI data songs in SONG mode (page EN-106).

While Recording

Sets whether the metronome will play a sound (On) or not (Off) while

recording with the MIDI recorder (page EN-113).

Selecting this setting: Sets this tempo (BPM)

Largo 46

Lento 52

Adagio 56

Andante 72

Moderato 96

Allegretto 108

Allegro 132

Vivace 160

Presto 184

Setting item Setting value and description

Bell Off Plays a click sound on every beat.

1 Beat Plays a bell sound on every beat.

2 Beat to 9 Beat

Sets the number of beats between 2 and 9.

Plays a bell sound on the first beat and a

click sound on the remaining beats.

Using the Metronome

EN-83

■ Drum Pattern List

■ To set the tempo by tapping a beat with the keyboard keys

While touching the FUNCTION button, touch the ENTER button.

The “TAP TEMPO” screen appears.

Press a keyboard key two or more times in succession.

• This sets the tempo according to the interval between key presses. The display shows the set

tempo value.

Drum Pattern Name Beat Description

8 Beat 1 4 Simple 8-beat rhythm

8 Beat 2 4 Simple 8-beat rhythm

8 Beat Shuffle 4 8-beat shuffle rhythm

Triplet8Beat 1 4 Triplet 8-beat rhythm

Triplet8Beat 2 4 Triplet 8-beat rhythm

6/8 Pop 6 6-beat rhythm for slow tempo

16 Beat 4 Simple 16-beat rhythm

16 Beat Shuffle 4 16-beat shuffle rhythm

Ballad 8 Beat 4 8-beat rhythm for slow tempo

Ballad 16 Beat 4 16-beat rhythm for slow tempo

Dance Beat 4 Simple dance beat

Dance Shuffle 4 Dance beat shuffle

Waltz 3 Waltz rhythm

March 2 2-beat march rhythm

Bossa Nova 4 Bossa nova rhythm

Salsa 4 Salsa rhythm with percussion

Swing 4 Swing rhythm for jazz

Slow Swing 4 Swing rhythm for slow jazz

Jazz Waltz 3 Jazz waltz rhythm

5/4 Jazz 5 5-beat jazz rhythm

EN-84

The Arpeggiator automatically plays arpeggios (broken chords) and various other patterns with a single

press of the keys. There are many types to choose from, including patterns that play arpeggios from

chords being played and many more.

Select the “12 Control” of the F button set. See “To change the F Button Set”

(page EN-32).

Touch the F1 button (ARPEG).

The Arpeggiator turns on and appears on the display.

• When a chord or single note is pressed on the keyboard, the Digital Piano plays an arpeggio of

the currently selected type.

To turn off the Arpeggiator, touch the F1 button (ARPEG) so is not displayed.

Select the “12 Control” of the F button set. See “To change the F Button Set”

(page EN-32).

Touch and hold the F1 button (ARPEG).

The “ARPEGGIATOR” screen appears.

Using the Arpeggiator

Enabling or Disabling the Arpeggiator

Changing the Arpeggiator Pattern and Other Settings

Appears when the Arpeggiator is on

Using the Arpeggiator

EN-85

Touch the top or bottom of the touch ring to select the setting you want to

change.

• The table below shows the setting items, values and descriptions of each.

*1 See “Arpeggiator List” (page EN-233).

*2 Items that are automatically set when this setting is “On” include the following:

• The key range (the Split Point between Upper and Lower Parts) in which the Arpeggiator plays is

set automatically. For this reason, depending on the keys pressed, the Arpeggiator may not play.

• Enabling/disabling the use of the pedal for each part (Upper 1/Upper 2/Lower) is set automatically.

The applicable pedals are those connected to the PEDAL UNIT jack and those connected to the

EXPRESSION/ASSIGNABLE jack (only when “Damper” is selected as the pedal’s function).

*3 Even if these settings are “Off”, if “Recommended Setup” is “On”, the recommended settings are

given priority and applied. For details on recommended settings for each pattern, see “Arpeggiator

List” (page EN-233).

Change the value of the selected item.

• Trace the touch ring to change the desired value.

Repeat Steps 3 and 4 as necessary.

• The arpeggio speed depends on the tempo setting. For more information, see “Changing the

Metronome Settings (Tempo, Beat, Pattern, etc.)” (page EN-81).

• You can assign turning the Arpeggio Hold on/off to a pedal connected to the EXPRESSION/

ASSIGNABLE jack. For more information, see “Using Pedals” (page EN-67).

• Assigning “Arpeg Note Len” to the CONTROL button allows you to change the length of notes in

some Arpeggiator patterns. For more information, see “Selecting the Function Assigned to the

CONTROL Button” (page EN-77).

• Assigning “Arpeg Note Len” to either of the K1 or K2 knob allows you to change the length of notes

in some Arpeggiator patterns. For more information, see “Changing the Function Assigned to a

Knob” (page EN-73).

Setting item Values Description

Pattern

Selects the pattern the Arpeggiator will play.

Recommended Setup On, Off

When “On”, the Digital Piano automatically

applies the recommended tones and settings for

the Arpeggiator’s pattern whenever you switch

the Arpeggiator from Off to On or whenever you

switch to “Pattern” while the Arpeggiator is on.

Arpeggio Hold On, Off

Toggles Arpeggio Hold On/Off. When “On”, the

arpeggio will continue to play even after you lift

your finger from the keys.

Upper1 Part

Upper2 Part

Lower Part

On, Off

Selects whether the Arpeggiator will play (On) or

not play (Off) in the Upper 1, Upper 2, or Lower

Parts.

EN-86

The state of various settings such as tone selection, Layers, Splits, and effects can be registered as a

performance setup. Registered settings can also be recalled

together simultaneously. This function is

called “Registration”.

* By using it with the Freeze function (page EN-90), it is possible to recall only a portion of the

registered settings.

There are four registration areas, REG 1 to REG 4, corresponding to the F1 (REG 1) to F4 (REG 4)

buttons, respectively. A set of REG 1 to REG 4 is called a “bank”, and there are 24 banks in total,

meaning you can register up to 96 setting states.

• Registration is not available during demo song playback (page EN-39), SONG mode (page EN-106),

or during various setting operations.

Saving and Recalling Performance Setups

(Registration)

Storage area (REG 1 to REG 4)

BANK1

BANK2

BANK3

BANK24

Saving and Recalling Performance Setups (Registration)

EN-87

Set as many tones, effects, and other registrable items (page EN-92) as you need.

Select the “02 Regist Setting” of the F Button Set. See “To change the F Button

Set” (page EN-32).

Touch the F1 button (BANK).

The “REGIST BANK” screen appears.

Trace the touch ring to select the destination bank, then touch the EXIT button.

Touch the F2 button (STORE).

The “REGIST STORE” screen appears.

Saving a Setup Registration

Saving and Recalling Performance Setups (Registration)

EN-88

Touch one of the F buttons (F1 to F4) to select the destination (REG 1 to REG 4).

A confirmation screen appears. To exit the operation without saving, touch the left of the touch ring

(NO).

Touch the right of the touch ring (YES) to save the registration.

“Complete” appears, and the display returns to the screen shown in Step 5.

Touch the EXIT button to return to the top screen.

Select the bank you want to rename using Steps 2 through 4 of “Saving a Setup

Registration” (page EN-87).

Touch the F4 button (BNAME).

The bank name editing screen appears.

Change the bank name to the desired name.

• For details on the subsequent steps, see “Text Character Input” (page EN-35).

Changing a Registration Bank Name

Saving and Recalling Performance Setups (Registration)

EN-89

Select the bank of the setup you want to recall by performing Steps 2 through 4

of “Saving a Setup Registration” (page EN-87).

• This procedure is not necessary if you want to recall the registration from the currently selected

bank.

Turn the Freeze function on or off as needed.

• For more information, see “Freeze Function” (page EN-90).

Select the “03 Registration” of the F Button Set. See “To change the F Button

Set” (page EN-32).

Touch one of the F buttons (F1 to F4).

The corresponding registration (REG 1 to REG 4) is recalled.

Recalling a Setup Registration

The [ ] indicates that registration was recalled

Saving and Recalling Performance Setups (Registration)

EN-90

By turning on the Freeze function, you can prevent certain setting items from being changed when the

registration is recalled. Use the following procedure to select which setting item to freeze.

■ To select freeze items

Select “02 Regist Setting” as the F Button Set. See “To change the F Button Set”

(page EN-32).

Touch and hold the F3 button (FREEZ).

The “FREEZE” screen appears.

Touch the top or bottom of the touch ring to select the setting item you want to

change.

• For details on the setting items, see “Registration Memory Data” (page EN-92).

Switch the setting value of the selected item between “On” (freeze) and “Off” (do

not freeze).

Repeat Steps 3 and 4 as necessary.

■ To enable or disable freeze

Select the “02 Regist Setting” of the F Button Set. See “To change the F Button

Set” (page EN-32).

Touch the F3 button (FREEZ).

The Freeze function is turned on, and appears on the display.

To turn off the Freeze function, touch the F3 button (FREEZ) so is not

displayed.

Freeze Function

Appears when Freeze is on

Saving and Recalling Performance Setups (Registration)

EN-91

Registrations can be sequentially recalled using a pedal connected to the EXPRESSION/

ASSIGNABLE jack.

Connect a pedal to the EXPRESSION/ASSIGNABLE jack.

• Make sure the pedal type corresponds to the connected pedal (see “To specify the pedal type”

(page EN-68)).

Refer to “To select freeze items” (page EN-90) to switch the “Pedal/Wheel”

setting to “On”.

Refer to “To enable or disable freeze” (page EN-90) to turn on the Freeze

function.

Refer to “To specify the pedal function” (page EN-69) to change the value of

“Pedal Target” to “Seq Recall Inc” or “Seq Recall Dec”.

Step on the pedal to recall a registration.

• When the set value is “Seq Recall Inc”:

Briefly stepping on the pedal recalls registrations in ascending order of “bank number –

registration number” (i.e., 1-1, 1-2, 1-3, 1-4, 2-1, 2-2...). Stepping on the pedal and holding it

recalls registrations in reverse order (i.e., 2-2, 2-1, 1-4, 1-3...).

• When the set value is “Seq Recall Dec”:

Briefly stepping on the pedal recalls registrations in descending order of “bank number -

registration number” (i.e., 24-4, 24-3, 24-2, 24-1, 23-4, 23-3...). Stepping on the pedal and

holding it recalls registrations in reverse order (i.e., 23-3, 23-4, 24-1, 24-2...).

Using a Pedal to Cycle Through Multiple Setup Registrations (Sequential

Recall)

Saving and Recalling Performance Setups (Registration)

EN-92

Registration Memory Data

Setting Items Freeze

• Pedal unit, EXPRESSION/ASSIGNABLE pedal, and pitch bend

wheel Part On/Off settings

• EXPRESSION/ASSIGNABLE pedal functions

• Pitch Bend Range

Pedal/Wheel

• CONTROL Button settings

• Knob settings

• Portamento On/Off, Rotary Slow/Fast, and Modulation (value, Part

On/Off) settings by CONTROL button operations

• Settings by knob operations

Knob/CTRL

• Scale settings (type, base note, stretch tuning) Scale Tuning

• Touch Response settings Touch Response

• Hall Simulator/Reverb (On/Off, Type)

• Surround (On/Off, Type)

Sound Mode

• Chorus type

• Brilliance setting

• Microphone Effect (Type, Effect On/Off, M1 to M3 settings)

• Brilliance setting by knob operations

Effect

• Transpose setting Transpose

• Split Point setting Split Point

• Arpeggiator (On/Off, Type, and other settings)

• Arpeggio Hold On/Off setting by a pedal connected to the

EXPRESSION/ASSIGNABLE jack

• Arpeggio Note Length settings by CONTROL button or knob

operations

Arpeggiator

• Metronome settings (Tempo, Tempo Mark, Guide Type, Pattern)

• Tempo setting by a pedal connected to the EXPRESSION/

ASSIGNABLE jack

Tempo

• Tone number (Upper 1, Upper 2, Lower)

• Layer On/Off, Split On/Off

• DSP (Type, parameters)

• Hammer Response, Key Off Response

• Octave Shift

• Part Fine Tune

• Duet settings

• Tone related settings by knob operations

Tone

• Mixer settings

• Mixer related settings by knob operations

• Layer Balance setting by a pedal connected to the EXPRESSION/

ASSIGNABLE jack

Mixer

Saving and Recalling Performance Setups (Registration)

EN-93

*1 The “Freeze” column shows the names of parameters included in the “FREEZE” screen. For more

information, see “To select freeze items” (page EN-90).

*2 Corresponds to the functions displayed as “Knob/CTRL” in the “Category” column of “List of

Assignable Functions to the Knobs” (page EN-74).

*3 Corresponds to the functions displayed as “Tone” in the “Category” column of “List of Assignable

Functions to the Knobs” (page EN-74).

*4 Corresponds to the functions displayed as “Mixer” in the “Category” column of “List of Assignable

Functions to the Knobs” (page EN-74).

Registration data can be saved to a USB flash drive as banks. For more information, see “Saving

Digital Piano Data to a USB Flash Drive” (page EN-143).

Saving to an External Device

EN-94

A set of four F buttons, each assigned a function, is called an F Button Set. There are 14 preset

F Button Sets that have predefined names and functions and 16 user F Button Sets that the user can

freely assign names and functions to.

Assign frequently used tones, functions, etc. to a user F Button Set according to the song you are

playing.

The names of F Button Sets 01 to 14 and the functions assigned to each F button are shown in the

table below.

Using the F Button Set

Preset F Button Set List

No. F Button Set Name F1 F2 F3 F4

01 Standard (Standard)

DEMO METRO SPLIT LAYER

02 Regist Setting (Registration Setting)

BANK STORE FREEZ BNAME

03 Registration (Registration)

REG 1 REG 2 REG 3 REG 4

04 Listening (Listening)

ADPTR SMODE PPOSI MIXER

05 Song Play (Song Play)

SONG SMODE PPOSI MICFX

06 Song Lesson (Song Lesson)

SONG s d METRO

07 Piano Collect (Piano Collection) 001PR 004ST 005BA 009CO

08 E.PianoCollect (Electric Piano Collection) 018SP 019JU 023IN 024WH

09 Favorite Piano (Favorite Piano) ACSIM EFECT SMODE PPOSI

10 Effect (Effect) SMODE PPOSI EFECT DSP

11 Vocal (Vocal)

ADPTR MICFX SMODE MIXER

12 Control (Control)

ARPEG TRANS KNOB CTRL

13 KB Setting (Keyboard Setting) KEYBD WHEEL PEDAL CTRL

14 Duet (Duet)

DUET METRO MIXER EFECT

This function can only be used with an F button (not included in the FUNCTION menu).

Recalls a dedicated screen.

Preset F Button Sets (01–14) User F Button Sets (15–30)

Using the F Button Set

EN-95

There are two ways to assign desired functions to F buttons, creating a user F Button Set:

• Edit the preset F Button Set (or a user F Button Set that has already been assigned functions) and

save it as a user F Button Set (see [Example 1]).

• Assign new functions to an empty user F Button Set and save it (see [Example 2]).

[Example 1]: Editing the “01 Standard” preset F Button Set and saving it as a user F

Button Set

Select the “01 Standard” of the F Button Set. See “To change the F Button Set”

(page EN-32).

While touching the FUNCTION button, touch the F1 button.

The “F BUTTON EDIT” screen appears.

• Since you touched the F1 button, the F1 button is selected as the target for assigning a

different function.

Editing an F Button Set

Assigning a Function to an F Button (Creating a User F Button Set)

Using the F Button Set

EN-96

Trace the touch ring to change the setting value for the F1 button.

• For details on the displayed settings and the corresponding functions, see “F Button Function

List” (page EN-103).

• To assign a tone to an F button, you must change the setting value to “Tone Category” and

touch the ENTER button to select a tone. For more information, see “Assigning a tone to an F

button” (page EN-99).

• To change the function assignments of other F buttons, touch the top or bottom of the touch ring

while the “F BUTTON EDIT” screen is displayed to select “F2”, “F3”, or “F4”, then change the

setting of the selected button.

When you are done making the necessary changes, touch the EXIT button.

A screen appears to confirm whether you want to save the F Button Set. To exit the operation

without saving, touch the left of the touch ring (NO).

Touch the right of the touch ring (YES) to save.

A screen appears to select which user F Button Set to use as the save destination.

• The user F Button Sets that have already been assigned functions and saved are marked with a

“ ” to the right of their numbers. Selecting a set marked with “ ” will overwrite it.

Using the F Button Set

EN-97

Trace the touch ring to select a user F Button Set as the save destination then

touch the ENTER button.

After “Complete” appears, the display returns to the top screen.

[Example 2]: Assigning new functions to an empty user F Button Set and saving it

Select an empty user F Button Set. See “To change the F Button Set” (page

EN-32).

Touch the FUNCTION button to display the FUNCTION menu.

Use the touch ring to select “F BUTTON SETTING” > “F BUTTON EDIT”.

Touch the ENTER button.

The “F BUTTON EDIT” screen appears.

• The F1 button is now selected as the target that will be assigned a different function.

• “----” appears to the right of the F buttons that do not have an assigned function.

Using the F Button Set

EN-98

Trace the touch ring to change the desired setting.

• For more information on the displayed settings and the assignable F button functions

corresponding to those settings, see “F Button Function List” (page EN-103).

• To assign a tone to the F button, you must change the setting value to “Tone Category” and

touch the ENTER button to select a tone. For more information, see “Assigning a tone to an F

button” (page EN-99).

Touch the top or bottom of the touch ring while the “F BUTTON EDIT” screen is

displayed to select “F2”, “F3”, or “F4”, and then change the setting of the

selected button.

When you are done making the necessary changes, touch the EXIT button.

A screen appears to confirm whether you want to save the F Button Set. To exit the operation

without saving, touch the left of the touch ring (NO).

Using the F Button Set

EN-99

Touch the right of the touch ring (YES) to save.

A screen appears to select which user F Button Set to use as the save destination.

• User F Button Sets that have already been assigned functions and saved are marked with a “ ”

to the right of their numbers. Selecting a set marked with “ ” will overwrite it.

Trace the touch ring to select the user F Button Set to use as the save destination

then touch the ENTER button.

After “Complete” appears, the display returns to the “F BUTTON SETTING” screen.

10.

Touch and hold the EXIT button to return to the top screen.

■ Assigning a tone to an F button

Perform the following during Step 3 of [Example 1] (page EN-95) or Step 4 of [Example 2] (page

EN-97).

Touch the ENTER button to display the list of settings and select “Tone

Category”.

Touch the ENTER button.

A list of tone categories is displayed.

Use the touch ring to select a tone category, then touch the ENTER button.

A list of tone names is displayed.

Use the touch ring to select a tone.

Using the F Button Set

EN-100

Touch the EXIT button three times to return to the “F BUTTON EDIT” screen.

• Regardless of the tone selected in Step 4 above, the “F BUTTON EDIT” screen will display “Tone

Category” as the setting value. When you return to the top screen after saving the F Button Set, the

tone number and the first two letters of the tone name appear in the F button menu, as shown below.

Select the F Button Set you want to rename. See “To change the F Button Set”

(page EN-32).

Touch the FUNCTION button to display the FUNCTION menu.

Use the touch ring to select “F BUTTON SETTING” > “FB SET NAME EDIT”.

Changing the Name of an F Button Set

Using the F Button Set

EN-101

Touch the ENTER button.

The F Button Set name editing screen appears.

Change the F Button Set name to the desired name.

• For more information on operations, see “To change a character” (page EN-35), “To insert a

character” (page EN-36), and “To delete a character” (page EN-36).

When you are done making your changes, touch the ENTER button.

A screen appears to confirm whether you want to save the name of the F Button Set. To return to

the editing screen without saving, touch the left of the touch ring (NO).

Touch the right of the touch ring (YES).

A screen appears to select which user F Button Set to use as the save destination.

Trace the touch ring to select the user F Button Set to use as the save

destination, then touch the ENTER button.

After “Complete” appears, the display returns to the “F BUTTON SETTING” screen.

Touch and hold the EXIT button to return to the top screen.

Using the F Button Set

EN-102

Touch the FUNCTION button to display the FUNCTION menu.

Use the touch ring to select “F BUTTON SETTING” > “FB SET CLEAR”.

Touch the ENTER button.

A screen appears to select the F button set to erase.

Touch the top or bottom of the touch ring to select the F button set to erase, then

touch the ENTER button.

A screen appears to confirm whether you want to erase the F Button Set. To cancel, touch the left

of the touch ring (NO).

Touch the right of the touch ring (YES) to erase.

After “Complete” appears, the display returns to the “F BUTTON SETTING” screen.

Touch and hold the EXIT button to return to the top screen.

Erasing an F Button Set

Using the F Button Set

EN-103

• The “Function Name” column indicates the value displayed on the “F BUTTON EDIT” screen.

• The “F Button Display” column is the text that appears in the F button menu.

• The “Function” column indicates the function to be performed when the F button is touched.

 indicates the function to be performed when the F button is pressed and held.

F Button Function List

Function

Name

F Button

Display

Function Reference

Demo DEMO

The Digital Piano will wait for the demo

song to start.

“Listening to the Demo

Songs” (page EN-39)

Metronome METRO Displays the metronome setting screen.

“Using the Metronome”

(page EN-81)

Split SPLIT

Turns Split on and off.

Displays the Split Point setting screen.

“Splitting the Keyboard

Between Two Tones

(Split)” (page EN-46)

Layer LAYER Turns Layer on and off.

“Sounding Two Different

Tones at the Same Time

(Layer)” (page EN-44)

Bank BANK

Displays the Registration Bank selection

screen.

“Saving a Setup

Registration” (page EN-87)

Bank Name BNAME

Displays the Registration Bank name edit

screen.

“Changing a Registration

Bank Name” (page EN-88)

Store STORE

Displays the “REGIST STORE” screen

(for saving a setup registration).

“Saving a Setup

Registration” (page EN-87)

Freeze FREEZ

Turns Freeze function on/off.

Displays the Freeze function setting

screen.

“Freeze Function”

(page EN-90)

Registration 1 REG 1

Recalls registration area numbers 1

through 4.

“Recalling a Setup

Registration” (page EN-89)

Registration 2 REG 2

Registration 3 REG 3

Registration 4 REG 4

Adaptor ADPTR

Turns the Wireless MIDI & Audio Adaptor

on and off.

Displays the wireless setup screen.

“Enabling and Disabling

the Digital Piano’s

Wireless Function”

(page EN-149)

Sound Mode SMODE

Displays the Sound Mode selection

screen.



Displays the Sound Mode setting

screen.

“Enabling or Disabling the

Hall Simulator/Reverb and

Surround Effects”

(page EN-49)

Piano Position PPOSI

Displays the Piano Position setting

screen.

“Selecting the Piano

Position Setting”

(page EN-38)

Using the F Button Set

EN-104

Effect EFECT

Displays the “EFFECT” screen where you

can select the Chorus Type and adjust

the Brilliance.

“Using Chorus (Chorus,

Flanger, Short Delay)”

(page EN-57),

“Adjusting Brilliance”

(page EN-58)

Mic Effect MICFX

Turns the Microphone Effect on and off.

Displays the Microphone Effect setting

screen.

“Using Microphone Effects”

(page EN-61)

DSP DSP

Turns DSP on and off.

Displays the DSP setting screen.

“Using DSP Effects”

(page EN-52)

Acoustic Sim. ACSIM

Displays the Acoustic Simulator settings

screen.

“Adjusting Acoustic Piano

Sound Characteristics

(Acoustic Simulator)”

(page EN-59)

Mixer MIXER Displays the Mixer settings screen.

“Using the Mixer”

(page EN-65)

Song SONG

Displays the SONG mode screen for

song playback.

“Playing Back MIDI Data or

Audio Data”

(page EN-107)

Arpeggiator ARPEG

Turns the Arpeggiator on and off.

Displays the Arpeggiator setting

screen.

“Using the Arpeggiator”

(page EN-84)

Duet DUET

Turns the Duet function on and off.

Displays the Duet function setting

screen.

“Splitting the Keyboard for

Duet Play” (page EN-135)

Keyboard KEYBD

Displays the “KEYBOARD” screen in the

FUNCTION menu.

“Using the FUNCTION

Menu” (page EN-33)

Knob KNOB

Displays the KNOB setting screen.

Resets the parameters of the functions

that are currently assigned to the knobs.

“

Using the Knobs”

(page EN-72)

Control CTRL

Displays the CONTROL button setting

screen.

“Using the CONTROL

Button” (page EN-77)

Pedal PEDAL

Displays the setting screen for the pedal

connected to the EXPRESSION/

ASSIGNABLE jack.

“EXPRESSION/

ASSIGNABLE jack”

(page EN-68)

Wheel WHEEL

Displays the pitch bend wheel setting

screen.

“Using the Pitch Bend

Wheel” (page EN-79)

Function

Name

F Button

Display

Function Reference

Using the F Button Set

EN-105

* The tone number (3 digits) of the specified tone followed by the first two letters of the tone name are

displayed.

Backs up the song a little.

Rewinds the song.

“Playing Back MIDI Data or

Audio Data”

(page EN-107)

Advances the song a little.

Fast-forwards the song.

“Playing Back MIDI Data or

Audio Data”

(page EN-107)

kkPauses the currently playing song.

“Playing Back MIDI Data or

Audio Data”

(page EN-107)

Song Type STYPE Displays the song setting screen.

“Playing Back MIDI Data or

Audio Data”

(page EN-107)

Transpose TRANS Displays the Transpose setting screen.

“Changing the Pitch in

Semitone Steps

(Transpose)”

(page EN-130)

Tone Category Recalls the specified tone.

“Assigning a tone to an F

button” (page EN-99)

– – – – – – – – No function assigned to the F button. –

Function

Name

F Button

Display

Function Reference

EN-106

MIDI and audio data can be played back in the SONG mode screen that appears when you touch the

a button.

• For details on saving MIDI and audio data that can be played back on this Digital Piano to a USB

flash drive, see “Saving MIDI Files or Audio Files for Playback on your Digital Piano to a USB Flash

Drive” (page EN-143).

■ MIDI Data

The table below shows the types of MIDI data saved in either the Digital Piano’s internal memory or

USB flash drive that can be played back.

*1 The song number is displayed to the left of the song data name in the SONG mode screen. You can

identify the type of MIDI song by the song number.

*2 The extension is displayed when the file is viewed on a computer or other device. It does not appear

in the SONG mode screen.

MID: Standard MIDI file (SMF format 0/1)

CMF: CASIO MIDI file (CASIO’s proprietary extended MIDI format)

MRF: Dedicated format for MIDI recorder songs recorded with this Digital Piano

Listening to Songs (SONG Mode)

Data Types of Playable Songs

Song Number

Type of Song File Extension

001 to 010

User songs: Up to 10 of your favorite songs can be stored in

the Digital Piano’s internal memory. The data can be

transferred to the Digital Piano from a USB flash drive or

smart device. For more information, see “Loading USB Flash

Drive Data into the Digital Piano’s Internal Memory” (page

EN-145) and “Using the Dedicated App” (page EN-155).

MID, CMF

011 to 015

MIDI recorder songs: Songs recorded by the Digital Piano’s

MIDI recorder. For more information, see “Using the MIDI

Recorder to Record Performances” (page EN-113).

MRF

016 to 999

USB flash drive songs: Standard MIDI files (SMF format 0/1)

or CASIO MIDI files (CMF format) stored on a USB flash

drive can be played back without having to transfer them to

the Digital Piano.

MID, CMF

SONG mode screen (in MIDI mode)

Song number

Data name (File name)

Listening to Songs (SONG Mode)

EN-107

■ Audio Data

The following audio data stored in a USB flash drive can be played back.

• WAV file (Linear PCM, 16-bit, 44.1kHz, stereo, file name extension: .WAV)

• MP3 file (MPEG-1 Audio Layer3, 44.1kHz/48kHz, 32 to 320kbps variable bit rate (VBR), monaural/

stereo, file name extension: .MP3)

Audio recorder songs recorded with this Digital Piano are WAV files (file names “TAKE01.wav” to

“TAKE99.wav”).

To play back songs stored on a USB flash drive, plug the USB flash drive into the USB Type A port of

the Digital Piano in advance.

• When a USB flash drive is inserted, “MOUNTING” will be displayed briefly. It may take a minute or so

for the message to disappear.

• For information on handling USB flash drives and plugging/unplugging them from the Digital Piano,

see “Preparing a USB Flash Drive” (page EN-138).

• For details on saving MIDI data and audio data to a USB flash drive for playback on this Digital

Piano, see “Saving MIDI Files or Audio Files for Playback on your Digital Piano to a USB Flash Drive”

(page EN-143).

• For details on loading MIDI data (user songs) from a USB flash drive to the internal memory of this

Digital Piano, see “Loading USB Flash Drive Data into the Digital Piano’s Internal Memory” (page

EN-145).

• The metronome can be used during MIDI data playback. For more information, see “Changing the

Metronome Settings (Tempo, Beat, Pattern, etc.)” (page EN-81). In the “METRONOME” screen, set

“While Playing” to “On”.

Touch the a button.

The SONG mode screen appears.

• If a song has been recorded (or played) since the Digital Piano was turned on, the last song

recorded (or played) will be played. To stop playback, touch the a button.

• The SONG mode screen can also be displayed by performing the following operations.

(1) Select the “05 Song Play” of the F button set. See “To change the F Button Set” (page EN-32).

(2) Touch the F1 button (SONG).

Playing Back MIDI Data or Audio Data

Listening to Songs (SONG Mode)

EN-108

Select “Song Type” according to the song you want to play.

(1) Touch the F4 button (STYPE).

(2) Trace the touch ring to select the “Song Type” setting from the following:

“MIDI” … Play MIDI data from the internal memory or a USB flash drive (MIDI Mode)

“Audio(USB Drv)” … Play audio data from a USB flash drive (Audio Mode)

(3) Touch the EXIT button to return to the SONG mode screen.

Trace the touch ring to select the song you want to play.

• For MIDI data and audio data for each song, see “Data Types of Playable Songs” (page

EN-106).

When playing back MIDI data, set the part and tempo to be played back as

needed.

• Touch the top or bottom of the touch ring to select the item whose setting you want to change.

To start playback, touch the a button.

• During playback, the following operations are available:

Touch the F1 button (s): Backs up the song a little.

Touch and hold the F1 button (s): While held down, the song will rewind.

Touch the F2 button (k): Pauses the currently playing song. Touch while paused to resume

playback.

Touch the F3 button (d): Advances the song a little.

Touch and hold the F3 button (d): While held down, the song will fast-forward.

• When the song reaches the end, playback will stop. Touch the a button to stop midway.

Setting item Setting values and descriptions

Part

For user songs and USB flash drive songs

L+R: Plays both parts

L: Plays only the left-hand part

R: Plays only the right-hand part

For MIDI recorder songs

System + Solo: Plays both tracks

System: Plays only the system track

Solo: Plays only the solo track

Tempo Sets the tempo of the song between 20 and 255 (beats/minute)

Listening to Songs (SONG Mode)

EN-109

In the “METRONOME” screen, turn “While Playing” to “On” to have the Metronome sound during MIDI

data playback.

For more information, see “Changing the Metronome Settings (Tempo, Beat, Pattern, etc.)” (page

EN-81).

Use “MIXER” > “VOLUME” > “MIDI Song” to adjust the playback volume of MIDI data relative to the

overall volume.

For more information, see “Adjusting the Volume Level, Stereo Pan and Effects for Each Part” (page

EN-65).

Follow steps 1 through 3 of “Playing Back MIDI Data or Audio Data” (page

EN-107) to select the user song (song numbers 001 to 010) you want to delete.

Touch and hold the 0REC button.

A confirmation screen will appear. To cancel the operation, touch the left of the touch ring (NO) at

this point.

Touch the right of the touch ring (YES) to delete.

“Complete” is displayed and the display returns to the SONG mode screen.

• For details on deleting a MIDI recorder song, see “Deleting a MIDI Recorder Song (Entire Song/

Individual Tracks)” (page EN-119).

Operations While Playing Back MIDI Data

Sounding Metronome While Playing Back MIDI Data

Adjusting the Volume Level of MIDI Data Playback (MIXER Settings)

Deleting a User Song

Listening to Songs (SONG Mode)

EN-110

Audio Center Cancel cuts (eliminates or reduces) vocals in the playback audio. Since this function

cancels the center-localized sound, sounds other than vocals may also be cut. The degree of the effect

depends on the audio data being played.

■ Enabling or Disabling Audio Center Cancel

Touch the a button to display the SONG mode screen.

Touch the F4 button (STYPE).

Touch the top or bottom of the touch ring to select “Audio C Cancel”.

Trace the touch ring to toggle the setting between “On” and “Off”.

Touch the EXIT button to return to the SONG mode screen.

See “Adjusting the Volume Level, Stereo Pan and Effects for Each Part” (page EN-65).

• Use “MIXER” > “VOLUME” > “Audio Song” to adjust the playback volume of audio data relative to the

overall volume.

• Use “MIXER” > “HALL/REV.” > “AudioSongSend” to adjust the send value of audio data to the Hall

Simulator/Reverb by changing the value of the “HALL/REV.” > “AudioSongSend” setting.

Operations While Playing Back Audio Data

Audio Center Cancel (Vocal Cut)

Adjusting the Volume Level or Effect Depth of Audio Data Playback (MIXER

Settings)

EN-111

Your Digital Piano can record what you play on the keyboard and play it back when you want. The

Digital Piano has two recording functions: a MIDI Recorder and an Audio Recorder. Select the function

that suits the needs for the type of recording you want to make.

• CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD. takes no responsibility for any damages, lost profits, or claims

by third parties arising from the deletion of recorded data due to malfunction, repair, or for

any other reason.

• Should power fail during recording, all of the data in the song you are recording will be deleted.

■ Recording Features

Recording Performances

MIDI Recorder and Audio Recorder Features

MIDI Recorder Audio Recorder

Keyboard performance information is recorded to

the Digital Piano’s internal memory

as MIDI

data

to two tracks (storage areas for keyboard

performance data).

• Keyboard performance information (keyboard

keys press/ release, key velocity, etc.) is

recorded as MIDI data.

• The size of MIDI data is much smaller when

compared with audio data, making it easier to

edit later on a computer, etc.

• Supported recording capacity: Up to five songs,

each song up to approximately 30,000 notes

(total of system track and solo track)

Keyboard performance information is recorded to

a USB flash drive

as audio data

• Like a portable music player or tape recorder,

notes are recorded as audio data.

• Audio data files are much larger compared to

MIDI data files. The advantage of audio data

files is that they can be easily played back on a

computer, portable music player, etc.

• Supported recording capacity: Up to 99 files,

each song up to a maximum length of

approximately 25 minutes

MIDI

What you can do...

 Record to one track while playing back from

the other track

System track Keyboard play

while playing

back...

Solo track

Keyboard play

USB

What you can do...

 Connect a microphone to record vocals

and the keyboard at the same time

Microphone input

Simultaneous

recording

Keyboard play

Recording Performances

EN-112

■ Playback Features

*1 MIDI

MIDI is short for “Musical Instrument Digital Interface”. It is a universal standard that makes it possible

for musical instruments, computers, and other devices to exchange performance information (keyboard

key press/release, key velocity, etc.) regardless of manufacturer. Performance data in this case is

called “MIDI data”.

*2 Audio data

Audio data recorded with this Digital Piano is saved in WAV file format (linear PCM, 16bit, 44.1kHz,

stereo).

• For details about the file formats of data supported by this Digital Piano, see “Data Types Supported

by the Digital Piano” (page EN-139).

• Data recorded on the Digital Piano can be saved to a USB flash drive. For more information, see

“Saving Digital Piano Data to a USB Flash Drive” (page EN-143).

MIDI Recorder Audio Recorder

Plays back system track and solo track

(simultaneously or individually).

• With the MIDI Recorder, the Digital Piano

automatically performs playback using its

internal sound source in accordance with the

performance information recorded as MIDI

data.

You can play back audio data from a USB flash

drive.

• The Audio Recorder plays back the waveform

of sound recorded as audio data.

What you can do...

 Play on the keyboard along with playback of

system track and solo track

System track While playing back...

Solo track While playing back...

Keyboard play

 After recording, change the tempo

For example, you can record at a slow tempo

and then play back at a faster tempo.

What you can do...

 Play along on the keyboard while the audio

data is playing

Playback of

audio data

Keyboard play

Recording Performances

EN-113

The MIDI recorder records keyboard performances and pedal operations as MIDI data.

Put the Digital Piano into MIDI Mode.

• Under the initial default settings, the Digital Piano is in MIDI Mode. In this case, proceed to step

(1) Touch the FUNCTION button to display the FUNCTION menu.

(2) Use the touch ring to select “SONG” and touch the ENTER button.

(3) Trace the touch ring to set the “Song Type” to “MIDI” (MIDI Mode).

(4) Touch and hold the EXIT button to exit the setup screen.

If necessary, set tones, effects, tempo, etc. for recording.

• See “Changing the Metronome Settings (Tempo, Beat, Pattern, etc.)” (page EN-81) for beat and

tempo settings, and whether the metronome should sound during recording. To have the

Metronome sound while recording, set “While Recording” to “On” in the “METRONOME” screen.

• A MIDI recorder song has two recording tracks (a system track and a solo track), and some

settings (such as effects) are recorded only on the system track. For what’s recorded on each

track, see “Items Reflected in Contents When Recording to the MIDI Recorder Song” (page

EN-120).

If necessary, select the song number to record to before recording.

• This operation may be omitted.

• If you select a song number that has already been recorded, the previous recording will be

overwritten. Only when you want to intentionally overwrite or select a specific song number,

perform the following operation.

(1) Touch the a button to display the SONG mode screen.

Using the MIDI Recorder to Record Performances

Recording with the MIDI Recorder

Recording Performances

EN-114

(2) Trace the touch ring to select one of the song numbers 011 to 015.

• See “NOTE” on page EN-115 for the song number of the MIDI recorder song.

Touch the 0REC button.

The 0REC button flashes red and the Digital Piano is ready to record.

• Touching the 0REC button again here exits record standby.

• Touch and hold the 0REC button to select the recording track and pre-count settings. For more

information, see “MIDI Recorder Recording Settings” (page EN-116).

To start recording, touch the a button.

When recording starts, the 0REC button lights up red.

• Recording can also be started automatically by pressing a keyboard key and starting to play.

Recording can also be started with any of the following operations:

− Pressing down on the pedal

− Recalling a registration (page EN-89)

− Pressing the CONTROL button

− Rotating either of the knob

− Moving the pitch bend wheel up or down

• When the remaining available capacity is low during recording, the 0REC button will flash.

When no more capacity is available, the 0REC button light will turn off and recording will stop.

• If you want to redo the recording due to a mistake while playing, touch and hold the 0REC

button during recording. The recorded data will be discarded, and the Digital Piano will return to

recording standby.

Recording Performances

EN-115

To end recording, touch the 0REC button.

The 0REC button will show a white light once again and the SONG mode screen will appear.

• If you want to immediately play back the recorded MIDI recorder song, touch the a button.

• For more information on playback operations, see “Playing Back MIDI Recorder Songs” (page

EN-118).

• MIDI recorder songs are stored in song numbers 011 to 015, “011 Rec Song 1” to “015 Rec Song 5”

in the internal memory. Up to five songs can be recorded. Each time you record, the lowest song

number that has not yet been recorded is automatically selected. However, please note the following:

– When the SONG mode screen is displayed in step 3 or step 6, and a song number between 011

and 015 is selected, touching the 0REC button to start recording will overwrite the selected song

number.

– If all five songs have been recorded and step 3 is omitted, when the 0REC button is touched in

step 4, “Data Full” will be displayed and recording will not begin. See “Deleting a MIDI Recorder

Song (Entire Song/Individual Tracks)” (page EN-119) to erase songs so that you can record again.

• The FUNCTION button is inoperative during recording. In addition, the function names of the

functions in the F Button Menu that cannot be used are displayed as “----”.

Recording Performances

EN-116

■ MIDI Recorder Recording Settings

A MIDI recorder song has two recording tracks (system track and solo track), and you can choose

which track to record to. A precount can also be set to indicate when recording will begin.

Perform the operation described in steps 1 through 4 of “Recording with the MIDI

Recorder” (page EN-113).

The 0REC button flashes red and the Digital Piano is ready to record.

Touch and hold the 0REC button.

The “RECORD SETTING” screen appears (record standby is maintained).

Touch the top or bottom of the touch ring to select the setting you want to

change.

• The table below shows the setting values and settings for each setting item.

Change the setting of the selected item.

• Trace the touch ring to change the desired setting.

Repeat steps 3 and 4 as necessary.

To start recording with the changed settings, resume operation from step 5 of

“Recording with the MIDI Recorder” (page EN-113).

• To stop recording at this point, touch the 0REC button. The 0REC button will light up white

again.

Setting item Setting values and descriptions

Rec Track

System: Records to the system track.

Solo: Records to the solo track.

For the recording content of each track see “Items Reflected in Contents When

Recording to the MIDI Recorder Song” (page EN-120).

Precount

Sets the pre-count before recording begins

Off: Pre-count is not sounded

1 Measure: One-bar measure pre-count

2 Measures: Two-bar measure pre-count

Recording Performances

EN-117

You can record to one track while playing back a pre-recorded track of a MIDI recorder song.

• If you make a mistake while overdub recording, you can erase and re-record the overdubbed track.

For more information, see “Deleting a MIDI Recorder Song (Entire Song/Individual Tracks)” (page

EN-119).

See “Playing Back MIDI Recorder Songs” (page EN-118) to select a pre-recorded

MIDI recorder song.

• Play the selected song to check the recording and the tracks that have already been recorded.

Touch the 0REC button.

The 0REC button flashes red and the Digital Piano is ready to record.

Touch and hold the 0REC button to display the “RECORD SETTING” screen.

Trace the touch ring to set the “Rec Track” to “System” or “Solo”.

• Select “Solo” to record the solo track while playing the pre-recorded system track, or “System” to

record the system track while playing the pre-recorded solo track.

Start and stop recording as shown in step 5 and after in “Recording with the MIDI

Recorder” (page EN-113).

Recording a Second Track Over the First (System Track + Solo Track)

Recording Performances

EN-118

Touch the a button.

The SONG mode screen appears.

• If any songs have been recorded (or played) since the Digital Piano was turned on, the last song

recorded (or played) will be played. To stop playback, touch the a button.

• From the SONG mode screen, you can play MIDI recorder songs as well as MIDI and audio

data in various formats. For more information, see “Listening to Songs (SONG Mode)” (page

EN-106).

If in Audio Mode, change to MIDI Mode.

• If “Part” and “Tempo” are not displayed in the SONG mode screen, the Digital Piano is in Audio

Mode. Perform the following operation to change it to MIDI Mode.

(1) Touch the F4 button (STYPE).

(2) Trace the touch ring to change the “Song Type” setting to “MIDI”.

(3) Touch the EXIT button to return to the SONG mode screen.

Trace the touch ring to select the MIDI recorder song you want to play.

The five MIDI recorder songs are named “011 Rec Song 1” to “015 Rec Song 5”. Select the

number of a song that has already been recorded.

If necessary, set the part and tempo to be played.

Touch the top or bottom of the touch ring to select the setting you want to change.

To start playback, touch the a button.

• During playback, the following operations are available.

Touch the F1 button (s): Backs up the song a little.

Touch and hold the F1 button (s): While held down, the song will rewind.

Touch the F2 button (k): Pauses the currently playing song. Touch while paused to resume

playback.

Touch the F3 button (d): Advances the song a little.

Touch and hold the F3 button (d): While held down, the song will fast-forward.

• When the song reaches the end, playback will stop. Touch the a button to stop midway.

Playing Back MIDI Recorder Songs

Setting item Setting values and descriptions

Part

System + Solo: Plays both tracks

System: Plays only the system track

Solo: Plays only the solo track

Tempo Sets the playback tempo from 20 to 255 (beats/minute).

Recording Performances

EN-119

“Playing Back MIDI Recorder Songs” (page EN-118) operation to select the MIDI

recorder song you want to erase.

Touch and hold the 0REC button.

The “CLEAR” screen appears.

Touch the top or bottom of the touch ring to select the target (the entire song or a

track) you want to erase.

Touch the ENTER button.

A confirmation screen will appear. To cancel the operation, touch the left of the touch ring (NO)

here.

To erase, touch the right of the touch ring (YES).

“Complete” is displayed and the display returns to the SONG mode screen.

Deleting a MIDI Recorder Song (Entire Song/Individual Tracks)

Menu item What will be erased

SONG CLEAR Erases the entire song

SYSTEM TRACK CLEAR Erases the system track only

SOLO TRACK CLEAR Erases the solo track only

Recording Performances

EN-120

The symbols below are used in the “System” column to indicate items that can be recorded to the

system track, and in the “Solo” column to indicate items that can be recorded to the solo track.

✓… Recorded — … Not recorded

Items Reflected in Contents When Recording to the MIDI Recorder Song

Operation or Setting System Solo

Keyboard operations ✓✓

Pedal operations

✓

Pitch Bend Wheel operations ✓✓

Pitch bend range ✓ ✓

The parameter settings with the knob operations (Portamento

Time setting, etc.)

✓

*3 *4

CONTROL button operations ✓ ✓

Acoustic Simulator settings ✓ —

Chorus type ✓ —

Brilliance setting ✓ —

Hall Simulator/Reverb settings

On/Off ✓ —

Type ✓ —

Surround settings ✓ —

Portamento On/Off ✓ ✓

Tone number ✓✓

Layer, Split ✓ —

Mixer

Volume

Keyboard overall volume ✓ —

Upper1, Upper2, Lower part volume ✓ ✓

Pan

Upper1, Upper2, Lower part pan ✓ ✓

Hall Simulator/Reverb

Overall reverb depth (reverb return) ✓ —

Upper1, Upper2, Lower part send ✓✓

Chorus

Upper1, Upper2, Lower part send ✓✓

Octave Shift ✓

✓

*5 *6

Recording Performances

EN-121

*1 Operation of pedals connected to this Digital Piano

*2 Not recorded depending on the function assigned to the pedal that is connected to the

EXPRESSION/ASSIGNABLE jack.

*3 Not recorded when one of the functions below is assigned to the knob.

“MIDISongVolume”, “WirelessAudioVol”, “AudioSongVolume”

*4 Not recorded when one of the functions below is assigned to the knob.

“Brilliance”, “Layer Balance”, “Upper2 Fine Tune”, “Upper2 Pan”, “Lower Volume”, “Lower Pan”,

“KB Group Volume”

When one of the functions below is assigned to the knob, only the setting changes to the Upper 1

part are recorded.

“KB Reverb Send”, “KB Chorus Send”, “UpperPanBalance”

*5 Upper 1 only

*6 Octave-shifted notes are recorded.

Part Fine Tune ✓✓

Scale settings ✓ —

Duet settings ✓ —

Metronome

Tempo ✓ —

Beat ✓ —

Operation or Setting System Solo

Recording Performances

EN-122

The audio recorder records the sound output from the Digital Piano as audio data, as shown below.

• Keyboard playing

• Audio input from microphone, etc.

Put the Digital Piano into Audio Mode.

(1) Touch the FUNCTION button to display the FUNCTION menu.

(2) Use the touch ring to select “SONG” then touch the ENTER button.

(3) Trace the touch ring to set the “Song Type” to “Audio(USB Drv)” (Audio Mode).

(4) Touch and hold the EXIT button to exit the setup.

Plug a USB flash drive into the USB Type A port on this Digital Piano.

• When a USB flash drive is plugged in, “MOUNTING” will be displayed for a while. It may take a

minute or so for the display to disappear.

• For information on handling USB flash drives and installing and removing them from the Digital

Piano, see “Connecting a USB Flash Drive to and Detaching It from the Digital Piano” (page

EN-141).

Touch the 0REC button.

The 0REC button flashes red and the Digital Piano is ready to record.

• Touching the 0REC button again here cancels record standby.

Recording a Performance with the Audio Recorder

Recording Using the Audio Recorder

Recording Performances

EN-123

To start recording, touch the a button.

When recording starts, the 0REC button lights up red.

• Recording can also be started automatically by pressing a keyboard key and starting to play.

Recording can also be started with any of the following operations:

− Pressing down on a foot pedal

− Recalling a registration (page EN-89)

− Pressing the CONTROL button

− Rotating either of the knob

− Moving the pitch bend wheel up or down

• When the remaining available capacity is low during recording, the 0REC button will flash.

When no more capacity is available, the 0REC button light will turn off and recording will stop.

• If you want to redo the recording due to a mistake while playing, touch and hold the 0REC

button during recording. The recorded data will be discarded, and the Digital Piano will return to

recording standby.

To stop recording, touch the 0REC button.

The 0REC button will show a white light once again and the SONG mode screen will appear.

• If you want to play the recorded audio recorder song immediately, touch the a button.

• For more information on playback operations, see “Playing Back a Song from the Audio

Recorder” (page EN-125).

• Audio recorder songs are saved with the file name “TAKE**.wav” (where ** is 01 to 99). Up to 99

songs can be recorded to the USB flash drive. Each time a recording is made, a file is automatically

created with the next number in sequence in the destination memory (internal or USB). For

information on what to do if you get a “Too Many Files” message and cannot start recording, see

“Error Messages” (page EN-168).

• The FUNCTION button is inoperative during recording. In addition, the function names of the

functions in the F Button Menu that cannot be used are displayed as “----”.

• The Digital Piano’s audio recorder records in WAV format. Recording in MP3 format is not supported.

• The table below lists the audio data that can be recorded and played back on the Digital Piano.

WAV format

(Record and playback)

• The maximum recorded length of a file is approximately 25 minutes, and

up to 99 files can be recorded (however, this depends on the available

capacity of the USB flash drive used).

• There is no limit to the playback time of a single file (depends on the

available capacity of the USB flash drive).

MP3 format

(Playback only)

There is no limit to the playback time of a single file (depends on the

available capacity of the USB flash drive).

Recording Performances

EN-124

• The formats of audio data that can be played on this Digital Piano are shown below. (For playback

operations, see “Playing Back a Song from the Audio Recorder” (page EN-125).)

WAV format audio data

MP3 format audio data

File name extension .WAV

Format Linear PCM

Sampling frequency 44.1kHz

Bit depth 16bit

Channel Stereo

File name extension .MP3

Format MPEG-1 Audio Layer3

Sampling frequency 44.1kHz/48kHz

Bit rate 32 to 320kbps variable bit rate (VBR)

Channel Monaural/Stereo

Recording Performances

EN-125

Touch the a button.

The SONG mode screen appears.

• If any songs have been recorded (or played) since the Digital Piano was turned on, the last song

recorded (or played) will be played. To stop playback, touch the a button.

• The SONG mode screen allows playback of MIDI data and audio data in various formats as well

as audio recorder songs. For more information, see “Listening to Songs (SONG Mode)” (page

EN-106).

If the Digital Piano is in MIDI Mode, change to Audio Mode.

• When “Part” or “Tempo” is displayed on the SONG mode screen, the Digital Piano is in MIDI

Mode. Use the following operation to change to Audio Mode.

(1) Touch the F4 (STYPE) button.

(2) Trace the touch ring to change the “Song Type” setting to “Audio(USB Drv)”.

(3) Touch the EXIT button to return to the SONG mode screen.

Trace the touch ring to select the audio recorder song you want to play.

To start playback, touch the a button.

• During playback, the following operations are available.

Touch the F1 button (s): Backs up the song a little.

Touch and hold the F1 button (s): While held down, the song will rewind.

Touch the F2 button (k): Pauses the currently playing song. Touch while paused to resume

playback.

Touch the F3 button (d): Advances the song a little.

Touch and hold the F3 button (d): While held down, the song will fast-forward.

• When the song reaches the end, playback will stop. Touch the a button to stop midway.

Playing Back a Song from the Audio Recorder

Recording Performances

EN-126

See “Playing Back a Song from the Audio Recorder” (page EN-125) to select the

audio recorder song you want to erase.

Touch and hold the 0REC button.

A confirmation screen will appear. To cancel the operation, touch the left of the touch ring (NO) at

this point.

To erase, touch the right of the touch ring (YES).

“Wait...” is displayed during the erase process. When done, “Complete” is displayed and the

display returns to the SONG mode screen.

Deleting a Song from the Audio Recorder

EN-127

Touch Response alters tone volume in accordance with keyboard velocity (speed). This provides you

some of the same expressivity you get on an acoustic piano.

Touch the FUNCTION button to display the FUNCTION menu.

Use the touch ring to select “KEYBOARD” > “KBD SETTING” then touch the

ENTER button.

The “KBD SETTING” screen appears.

• Confirm that the cursor ( ) is on “Touch Response”.

Adjusting Keyboard Sensitivity

Changing Keyboard Response to Key Velocity (Touch

Response)

Pressing fast produces louder notes.

Pressing slowly produces softer notes.

Do not try to use too much pressure.

Changing Touch Response Sensitivity

Adjusting Keyboard Sensitivity

EN-128

Change the value of the “Touch Response” setting.

• Trace the touch ring to change the desired setting value.

An acoustic piano has hammers of different sizes that strike the strings in different key ranges, so the

timing of the sound is different for each key range. “Hammer Response” in the FUNCTION menu can

be used to select the timing of the sound.

Touch the FUNCTION button to display the FUNCTION menu.

Use the touch ring to select “KEYBOARD” > “KBD SETTING” > “Hammer

Response”.

Change the “Hammer Response” setting.

• Use the touch ring to change the desired value.

Setting value Description

Off

Disables Touch Response. Sound volume is fixed, regardless of key press

speed.

Light 2

Light 1

Makes production of a louder sound easier, so touch feels lighter than

“Normal”.

“Light 2” is lighter to the touch than “Light 1”.

Normal Specifies normal sensitivity.

Heavy 1

Heavy 2

Makes production of a louder sound more difficult, so touch Heavy feels

heavier than “Normal”.

“Heavy 2” is heavier to the touch than “Heavy 1”.

Adjusting the Timing of Key Press to Sound (Hammer

Response)

Adjusting the Hammer Response

Setting value Description

Tone A value appropriate for the selected tone is automatically set.

Off Fastest response in all key ranges.

1 to 10 The higher the value, the slower the timing of the sound.

Adjusting Keyboard Sensitivity

EN-129

On a grand piano, when a key is released, the damper comes down on the strings and the note is

damped. The Digital Piano’s Key-off Response function simulates digitally the timing of the note

damping based on how the key is released.

Using this function, you can set it to allow subsequent key strikes to sound even if the key is not fully

released during a series of same-note hits – just like a grand piano. This makes possible detailed touch

expressions such as whether notes are connected or cut off, allowing for a natural playing feel.

The “KeyOff Response” in the FUNCTION menu can be used to adjust the timing of the damping.

Touch the FUNCTION button to display the FUNCTION menu.

Use the touch ring to select “KEYBOARD” > “KBD SETTING” > “KeyOff

Response”.

Change the “KeyOff Response” setting.

• Use the touch ring to change the desired setting value.

Adjusting the Timing of Key Release to Sound Damping

(Key-off Response)

Adjusting the Key-off Response

Setting value Description

Tone A value appropriate for the selected tone is automatically set.

1 to 3 The higher the value, the slower the timing of the sound.

EN-130

Use the transpose feature to raise or lower the pitch of all notes in semitone steps. This allows you to

transpose the key of your playing to another key.

Select the “12 Control” of the F Button Set. See “To change the F Button Set”

(page EN-32).

Touch the F2 button (TRANS).

The “TRANSPOSE” screen appears.

Trace the touch ring to change the setting value.

• It can be changed to a value between –12 and +12 semitones.

Use the tuning feature when you need to adjust the overall pitch of the Digital Piano.

• The tuning feature specifies the frequency of the A4 note. You can set a frequency within the range

of 415.5 to 465.9 Hz. The initial default setting is 440.0 Hz.

• You can change the frequency in 0.1 Hz steps.

Touch the FUNCTION button to display the FUNCTION Menu.

Touch the top or bottom of the touch ring to select “SYSTEM”, then touch the

ENTER button.

The “SYSTEM” screen appears.

• Confirm that the cursor ( ) is on “Master Tuning”.

Change the value of the “Master Tuning” setting.

• Trace the touch ring to change the desired setting value.

Changing the Pitch

Changing the Pitch in Semitone Steps (Transpose)

Changing the Transpose Setting

Fine Tuning a Pitch (Master Tuning)

Changing the Pitch

EN-131

Each part can be individually fine-tuned between –99 and +99 cents (100 cents = 1 semitone) relative

to the tuning of the entire instrument. By shifting the tuning of each part slightly, you can create a full-

bodied ensemble feel.

• For details on parts, see “Sounding Two Different Tones at the Same Time (Layer)” (page EN-44)

and “Splitting the Keyboard Between Two Tones (Split)” (page EN-46).

Touch the FUNCTION button to display the FUNCTION Menu.

Use the touch ring to select “KEYBOARD” > “PART FINE TUNE”, then touch the

ENTER button.

The “PART FINE TUNE” screen appears.

Touch the top or bottom of the touch ring to select the part you want to fine-tune.

Change the setting value of the selected part.

• Trace the touch ring to change the desired setting value.

Repeat Steps 3 and 4 as necessary.

Adjusting the Tuning Separately for Each Part (Upper 1/Upper 2/Lower)

(Part Fine Tune)

Changing the Pitch

EN-132

Use the Octave Shift feature to raise or lower the pitch of all notes in octave units. Each part (Upper 1,

Upper 2, Lower) can be set individually when using the Layer or Split functions.

• For details on parts, see “Sounding Two Different Tones at the Same Time (Layer)” (page EN-44)

and “Splitting the Keyboard Between Two Tones (Split)” (page EN-46).

Touch the FUNCTION button to display the FUNCTION Menu.

Use the touch ring to select “KEYBOARD” > “PART OCT SHIFT”, then touch the

ENTER button.

The “PART OCT SHIFT” screen appears.

Touch the top or bottom of the touch ring to select the part to octave shift.

Change the setting value of the selected part.

• Trace the touch ring to change the desired setting value.

Repeat Steps 3 and 4 as necessary.

Changing the Pitch in Octave Units (Octave Shift)

Using Octave Shift Separately for Each Part (Upper 1/Upper 2/Lower)

Changing the Pitch

EN-133

You can change the scale of the keyboard from the standard equal temperament to another tuning that

is more suitable for playing Indian music, Arabic music, classical music, etc. You can select from

among the 17 preset scales described below.

Touch the FUNCTION button to display the FUNCTION Menu.

Use the touch ring to select “KEYBOARD” > “SCALE TUNING”, then touch the

ENTER button.

The “SCALE TUNING” screen appears.

• Confirm that the cursor ( ) is on “Scale Type”.

Change the “Scale Type” setting value.

• Trace the touch ring to change the desired setting value.

• You can choose from the temperaments in the table below.

Changing the Scale Tuning (Temperament) of the Keyboard

Changing the Scale

Setting Value Scale (Temperament) Name

Equal Equal Temperament

Pure Major Pure Major Temperament

Pure Minor Pure Minor Temperament

Pythagorean Pythagorean Temperament

Kirnberger 3 Kirnberger 3 Temperament

Werckmeister Werckmeister Temperament

Mean-Tone Mean-Tone Temperament

Rast Rast

Bayati Bayati

Hijaz Hijaz

Saba Saba

Dashti Dashti

Chahargah Chahargah

Segah Segah

Gurjari Todi Gurjari Todi

Chandrakauns Chandrakauns

Charukeshi Charukeshi

Changing the Pitch

EN-134

If necessary, change the base note of the scale.

(1) In the “SCALE TUNING” screen, touch the top or bottom of the touch ring to select the “Scale

Base Note”.

(2) Trace the touch ring to change the desired base note.

Generally, a piano is tuned so high notes are relatively higher and low notes are relatively lower. This

type of tuning is called “stretch tuning”. You can disable Stretch Tuning, if you want.

Touch the FUNCTION button to display the FUNCTION Menu.

Use the touch ring to select “KEYBOARD” > “SCALE TUNING” > “Stretch

Tuning”.

Trace the touch ring to toggle the setting value between “On” and “Off”.

Enabling or Disabling Piano Stretch Tuning

EN-135

You can split the keyboard in the center for duet play so the left and right sides have the same ranges.

The Duet function is the perfect way to conduct lessons, with the teacher playing on the left side as the

student plays the same song on the right side. You can also change the ranges of the left and right

keyboards in octave units from their initial default settings.

Select the “14 Duet” of the F Button Set. See “To change the F Button Set” (page

EN-32).

Touch the F1 button (DUET).

Duet is turned on, and the indicator appears on the display.

If necessary, change the settings for the Duet function.

• The keyboard range can be changed in octave units, and the sound output by the left and right

side of the keyboard can be split between the left and right speakers. For more information, see

“Configuring Duet Settings” (page EN-137).

Splitting the Keyboard for Duet Play

Using the Duet

C3 C4 C5 C6 C3 C4 C5

Split point

Left keyboard Right keyboard

(middle C) (middle C)

Displayed when Duet is on

Splitting the Keyboard for Duet Play

EN-136

Play duets using the left and right sides of the keyboard.

• When Duet is active, the left and right pedals serve as damper pedals for the left and right-side

of the keyboard, respectively, and the center pedal serves a damper pedal for both left and right.

To turn off Duet, touch the F1 button (DUET). The indicator disappears.

• A sustain pedal (sold separately) can be connected to the EXPRESSION/ASSIGNABLE jack and

used as a shared (left and right) damper pedal. Half-pedal operation is not supported.

• Some settings cannot be changed while Duet is active.

• The following functions are assigned to the CONTROL button, and K1 and K2 knobs, respectively,

while Duet is active (they cannot be changed).

CONTROL button: Modulation

K1 knob: KB Group Volume

K2 knob: WirelesAudioVol

Left side damper pedal

Left and right side damper pedal

Right side damper pedal

Splitting the Keyboard for Duet Play

EN-137

Select the “14 Duet” of the F Button Set. See “To change the F Button Set” (page

EN-32).

Touch and hold the F1 button (DUET).

The “DUET” screen appears.

Touch the top or bottom of the touch ring to select the item whose setting value

you want to change.

• The table below shows the setting values and details for each setting item.

Change the setting value of the selected item.

• Trace the touch ring to change the desired setting value.

Repeat Steps 3 and 4 as necessary.

• When “Duet Mode” is set to “Duet Pan”, the Hall Simulator/Reverb (page EN-49), Surround (page

EN-49), DSP (page EN-52), Chorus (page EN-57), and Acoustic Simulator (page EN-59) functions

and some Mixer settings (page EN-65) are not available.

Configuring Duet Settings

Setting Item Setting Value Description

Duet Mode

Duet On

Both speakers output sound from both the left and

right sides of the keyboard.

Duet Pan

The left speaker outputs sound from the left side of

the keyboard only, and the right speaker outputs

sound from the right side of the keyboard only.

Upper Octave,

Lower Octave

–2, –1, 0, +1, +2

“Upper Octave” raises or lowers the range of the right

side of the keyboard, while “Lower Octave” raises or

lowers the range of the left side of the keyboard, both

in octave units. Increasing the setting value by one

raises the keys one octave. Decreasing it by one

lowers the keys one octave (initial default setting: 0).

EN-138

Your Digital Piano supports the following USB flash drive operations.

(1) USB Flash Drive on the Digital Piano

• Playing back audio data on a USB flash drive

“Listening to Songs (SONG Mode)” (page EN-106)

• Playing back MIDI files on a USB flash drive

“Listening to Songs (SONG Mode)” (page EN-106)

• Loading compatible files on a USB flash drive into the Digital Piano’s Internal Memory

“Loading USB Flash Drive Data into the Digital Piano’s Internal Memory” (page EN-145)

• Deleting USB flash drive files

“Deleting a USB Flash Drive File” (page EN-146)

• Renaming USB flash drive files

“Renaming a USB Flash Drive File” (page EN-147)

(2) Saving Digital Piano Data to a USB Flash Drive

Saving the following data recorded by this Digital Piano to a USB flash drive allows you to load and

use the data in the future.

• MIDI recorder songs

• Registration data

• All user data

“Saving Digital Piano Data to a USB Flash Drive” (page EN-143)

This section explains the information below.

• USB flash drive supported for use with the Digital Piano

• Data types supported by the Digital Piano using a USB flash drive

• Connecting a USB flash drive to and detach it from the Digital Piano

• Formatting a USB flash drive

Capacity: 32GB or less recommended

• Use a FAT (FAT32 or exFAT) format USB flash drive.

• You may not be able to use a USB flash drive that is recognized as multiple drives on your

computer.

• A USB flash drive that is recognized as a CD-ROM on your computer is not supported.

• A USB flash drive with an anti-virus function and/or security functions is not supported.

USB Flash Drive

Preparing a USB Flash Drive

Supported USB Flash Drives

(1)

(2)

USB Flash Drive Digital Piano

USB Flash Drive

EN-139

Data from a USB flash drive that can be read by the Digital Piano includes song data (MIDI and audio

data), registration data, and all user data stored in the Digital Piano.

■ Song Data

Audio Data

• WAV format:

This is a standard audio file format used primarily by Windows. The Digital Piano supports the

following WAV file format:

Linear PCM, 16-bit, 44.1kHz, stereo, file name extension: .WAV

• MP3 format:

This is a common audio file format used widely in online music distribution, etc. This Digital Piano

supports the following MP3 file formats:

MPEG-1 Audio Layer3, 44.1kHz/48kHz, 32 to 320kbps variable bit rate (VBR), monaural/stereo, file

name extension: .MP3

MIDI Data

• MRF format (CASIO original file format):

MIDI data recorded with the Digital Piano’s MIDI Recorder. (file name extension: .MRF)

• CMF format (CASIO original file format):

This file format adds CASIO proprietary data to MIDI data. (file name extension: .CMF)

• SMF (Standard MIDI File) Format 0/1:

Standard MIDI file format that can be exchanged with a compatible device from another

manufacturer. (File name extension: .MID)

*1 Can be converted to Standard MIDI file (SMF format 0, File name extension: .MID) for save.

– Saving as a MRF format file

In addition to performance information, model-specific settings (such as Acoustic Simulator)

are also saved to the file, so you can reproduce the original performance in its entirety after

reloading the data.

Note, however, that MRF file data is not compatible with other musical instrument types and

models.

Data Types Supported by the Digital Piano

Data Type

File

Name

Exten-

sion

Save

(Digital Piano

→ USB Flash

Drive)

Load

(USB Flash

Drive →

Digital Piano)

Direct

Recording to

USB Flash

Drive

Direct USB

Flash Drive

Playback

Audio Data

Audio Recorder

song file

(page EN-122)

.WAV

——

Yes

General audio file

.WAV

—

.MP3

MIDI Data

MIDI Recorder

song files

(page EN-113)

.MRF Yes

Yes — —

CASIO MIDI file

.CMF

—Yes

Standard MIDI file

(SMF format)

.MID

USB Flash Drive

EN-140

– Saving as an SMF format file

Performance information is saved, but models specific-settings are not saved. Because of

this, playback of a reloaded file will be in accordance with the current Digital Piano setup,

which may be different from the original setup. If you want to play with the original setup, you

will need to configure it manually. Since this is an SMF file, it can be used on another musical

instrument that supports SMF. Of course, playback will be somewhat different when played

on another musical instrument.

*2 Songs downloaded from the CASIO website, etc.

*3 The song is loaded as a user song (song number 001 to 010). See “Data Types of Playable Songs”

(page EN-106).

■ Registration Data

Registration data from the Digital Piano can be saved to a USB flash drive as banks (extension: .RBK).

RBK files can be loaded into the Digital Piano from a USB flash drive.

For details on registration, see “Saving and Recalling Performance Setups (Registration)” (page

EN-86).

■ All User Data

All user data stored in the Digital Piano can be saved as a single file to a USB flash drive (extension:

.DAL). Saved DAL files can be loaded into the Digital Piano from a USB flash drive.

Copyrights

The rights of creators and copyright holders of music, images, computer programs, databases, and

other data are protected by copyright laws. You are allowed to reproduce such works for personal

or noncommercial use only. For any other purpose, all reproduction (including data format

conversion), modification, transfer of reproductions, distribution over a network, or any other use

without permission of the copyright holder exposes you to claims for damages and criminal

prosecution for copyright infringement and violation of the author’s personal rights. Be sure to

reproduce and otherwise use copyrighted works only in accordance with applicable copyright laws.

USB Flash Drive

EN-141

• Be sure to observe the precautions provided in the documentation that comes with the USB flash drive.

• Avoid using a USB flash drive under the following conditions. Such conditions can corrupt data

stored on the USB flash drive.

– Areas subjected to high temperature, high humidity, or corrosive gas

– Areas subjected to strong electrostatic charge and electrical noise

• Never remove the USB flash drive while data is being written to or loaded from it. Doing so can

corrupt the data on the USB flash drive and damage the USB Type A port.

• Never insert anything besides a USB device that is specified for use with this Digital Piano into the

USB Type A port. Doing so creates the risk of malfunction.

• When you perform a USB flash drive operation while a USB flash drive is plugged in, the Digital

Piano initially needs to perform a “mounting” sequence to prepare for data exchange with the USB

flash drive. Digital Piano operations may be momentarily difficult while a mounting sequence is being

performed. The message “MOUNTING” is displayed while the USB flash drive is being mounted. It

may take up to 10 or 20 seconds or even longer for a USB flash drive to be mounted. We

recommend that you do not attempt to perform any operation on the Digital Piano while a mounting

sequence is in progress. A USB flash drive needs to be mounted each time it is connected to the

Digital Piano.

■ To insert a USB flash drive

As shown in the illustration below, insert the USB flash drive into the Digital

Piano’s USB Type A port.

• Carefully push the USB flash drive in as far as it will go. Do not use undue force when inserting

the USB flash drive.

• Static electricity conducted to the USB Type A port from your hand or from a USB flash drive

can cause malfunction of the Digital Piano. If this happens, turn the Digital Piano off and then

back on again.

■ To remove a USB flash drive

Check to confirm that no data read/write operation is in progress.

• Do not proceed to step 2 if data is being read or written, as in the following cases:

− If “MOUNTING” or “Wait...” is displayed on screen

− If the USB flash drive is in use by the audio recorder or SONG mode.

Pull the USB flash drive straight out.

• A USB flash drive can become warm after very long use. This is normal and does not indicate

malfunction.

Connecting a USB Flash Drive to and Detaching It from the Digital Piano

USB flash drive

USB Type A port

USB Flash Drive

EN-142

Formatting a USB flash drive on the Digital Piano will create a folder named MUSICDAT in the drive’s

root directory if a MUSICDAT folder does not already exist there. Use this folder when exchanging data

between the Digital Piano and USB flash drive.

• Be sure to format a USB flash drive on the Digital Piano before using it for the first time.

• Formatting a USB flash drive deletes all data currently stored on it. Before formatting a USB

flash drive, make sure it does not have any valuable data stored on it.

• The format operation performed by this Digital Piano is a “quick format”. If you want to

completely delete all of the data in the USB flash drive, format it on your computer or some

other device before formatting it with this Digital Piano.

• In the case of an exFAT format USB flash drive, the number of importable files may be limited

if long file names are used.

Insert the USB flash drive you want to format into the USB Type A port on the

Digital Piano.

Touch the FUNCTION button to display the FUNCTION Menu.

Use the touch ring to select “MEDIA” > “FORMAT”, then touch the ENTER

button.

A confirmation screen appears. To cancel the operation, touch the left of the touch ring (NO).

To confirm the formatting, touch the right of the touch ring (YES).

• Formatting begins and “Wait...” appears. Do not perform any action using the Digital Piano

during this period. Formatting a large-capacity USB flash drive may take several minutes.

• When formatting is complete, “Complete” appears.

Formatting a USB Flash Drive

USB Flash Drive

EN-143

The procedure below can be used to save MIDI files (SMF or CMF) and audio files (WAV or MP3) to a

USB flash drive and play them back on the Digital Piano.

Connect the USB flash drive to your computer.

Create a folder named MUSICDAT in the root directory of the USB flash drive.

• This step is not required if there is already a MUSICDAT folder in the USB flash drive’s root

directory.

Move the MIDI files or audio files you want to play back to the MUSICDAT folder

on the USB flash drive.

• For information about playback see “Listening to Songs (SONG Mode)” (page EN-106).

Touch the FUNCTION button to display the FUNCTION Menu.

Use the touch ring to select “MEDIA” > “SAVE”, then touch the ENTER button.

The “MEDIA SAVE” screen displays a menu for selecting the type of data that can be saved.

“MIDI REC SONG” … MIDI recorder songs

“REGIST BANK” … Registration Bank

“ALL” … All user data in the Digital Piano’s internal memory

Saving MIDI Files or Audio Files for Playback on your

Digital Piano to a USB Flash Drive

Copyrights

You are allowed to use recordings for your personal use. Any reproduction of an audio or music

format file without the permission of its copyright holder is strictly prohibited under copyright laws

and international treaties. Also, making such files available on the Internet or distributing them to

third parties, regardless of whether such activities are conducted with or without compensation, is

strictly prohibited under copyright laws and international treaties. CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.

shall not be held in any way liable for any use of this Digital Piano that is illegal under copyright

laws.

Saving Digital Piano Data to a USB Flash Drive

USB Flash Drive

EN-144

Touch the top or bottom of the touch ring to select the type of data to save, then

touch the ENTER button.

• If you choose “ALL”, after touching the ENTER button the file name edit screen will be

displayed so proceed to Step 5. Otherwise, the screen for selecting the type of data to save will

be displayed so proceed to Step 4.

Perform the following actions depending on the type of data you selected.

■ If you selected “MIDI REC SONG”:

(1) Touch the top or bottom of the touch ring to select the data to save, then touch the ENTER

button.

A screen appears for selecting the file format (MRF or MID) to save the data in.

(2) Touch the top or bottom of the touch ring to select “MRF” (dedicated format for this Digital

Piano) or “MID” (SMF format), then touch the ENTER button.

The file name editing screen appears.

■ If you selected “REGIST BANK”:

(1) Touch the top or bottom of the touch ring to select the data to save, then touch the ENTER

button.

The file name editing screen appears.

Rename the file if necessary.

• For details, see “To change a character” (page EN-35), “To insert a character” (page EN-36),

and “To delete a character” (page EN-36).

To confirm the file name, touch the ENTER button.

“Sure?” or “Replace?” appears in the screen confirming whether you want to save the file.

“Sure?” .............. Appears when there are no files with the same name on the destination USB

flash drive.

“Replace?”......... Confirms whether you want to overwrite an existing file with the same name on

the destination USB flash drive.

• To exit the operation without saving, touch the left of the touch ring (NO).

To save, touch the right of the touch ring (YES).

“Wait...” is displayed during the save process. Do not perform any action on the Digital Piano while

this is happening. When saving is complete, “Complete” appears.

• It may take several minutes to save all user data, depending on the size of the data.

USB Flash Drive

EN-145

Touch the FUNCTION button to display the FUNCTION Menu.

Use the touch ring to select “MEDIA” > “LOAD”, then touch the ENTER button.

The “MEDIA LOAD” screen displays a menu for selecting the type of data you want to load.

“USER SONG” … User songs

“MIDI REC SONG” … MIDI recorder songs

“REGIST BANK” … Registration Bank

“ALL” … All user data in the Digital Piano’s internal memory

Touch the top or bottom of the touch ring to select the type of data, a file to load,

then touch the ENTER button.

A screen appears to select which area of the Digital Piano to load.

• If “ALL” is selected, touching the ENTER button immediately displays the confirmation screen

in Step 4 (“Replace?”).

Touch the top or bottom of the touch ring to select the area to load from, then

touch the ENTER button.

The “Sure?” or “Replace?” message appears in the screen confirming whether you want to load

the file.

“Sure?” .............. Appears when there is no data in the load destination.

“Replace?”......... Checks whether you want to overwrite the data, since there is data in the load

destination.

• To exit the operation without loading any data, touch the left of the touch ring (NO).

To load a file into the Digital Piano, touch the right of the touch ring (YES).

“Wait...” is displayed during the loading process. Do not perform any action on the Digital Piano

while this is happening. When loading is complete, “Complete” appears.

• It may take several minutes to load all user data, depending on the size of the data.

Loading USB Flash Drive Data into the Digital Piano’s

Internal Memory

USB Flash Drive

EN-146

Touch the FUNCTION button to display the FUNCTION Menu.

Use the touch ring to select “MEDIA” > “DELETE”, then touch the ENTER

button.

The “MEDIA DELETE” screen displays a menu for selecting the types of files that can be deleted.

“USER SONG” … User songs

“MIDI REC SONG” … MIDI recorder songs

“AUDIO REC SONG” … Audio recorder songs, general audio file

“REGIST BANK” … Registration Bank

“ALL” … All user data in the Digital Piano’s internal memory

Touch the top or bottom of the touch ring to select the type of file to delete, then

touch the ENTER button.

Touch the top or bottom of the touch ring to select the file you want to delete.

Touch the ENTER button.

A screen (“Sure?”) appears to confirm whether you want to delete it.

• To exit the operation without deleting it, touch the left of the touch ring (NO).

To delete it, touch the right of the touch ring (YES).

“Wait...” is displayed during the delete process. Do not perform any action on the Digital Piano

while this is happening. When deletion is complete, “Complete” appears.

• It may take several minutes to delete audio recorder songs or all user data, depending on the

size of the data.

Deleting a USB Flash Drive File

USB Flash Drive

EN-147

Touch the FUNCTION button to display the FUNCTION Menu.

Use the touch ring to select “MEDIA” > “RENAME”, then touch the ENTER

button.

“MEDIA RENAME” screen appears with a menu to select the types of files that can be renamed.

“USER SONG” … User songs

“MIDI REC SONG” … MIDI recorder songs

“AUDIO REC SONG” … Audio recorder songs, general audio file

“REGIST BANK” … Registration Bank

“ALL” … All user data in the Digital Piano’s internal memory

Touch the top or bottom of the touch ring to select the type of file to rename, then

touch the ENTER button.

Touch the top or bottom of the touch ring to select the file to rename.

Touch the ENTER button.

The file name editing screen appears.

Rename the file.

• For details of the procedure, see “To change a character” (page EN-35), “To insert a character”

(page EN-36), and “To delete a character” (page EN-36).

To confirm the file name, touch the ENTER button.

The confirmation screen displays “Sure?” or “Replace?”.

“Sure?” .............. Appears when there are no files with the same name on the destination USB

flash drive.

“Replace?”......... Confirms whether you want to overwrite a file with the same file name on the

destination USB flash drive.

• To exit the operation without renaming (or without overwriting a file with the same name), touch

the left of the touch ring (NO).

To rename (or to overwrite a file with the same name), touch the right of the touch

ring (YES).

“Wait...” appears during the process. Do not perform any action on the Digital Piano while this is

happening. When the process is complete, “Complete” appears.

Renaming a USB Flash Drive File

EN-148

To change the MIDI settings of the Digital Piano, use the setting items of the FUNCTION Menu (page

EN-33) listed in the table below.

Configuring MIDI Settings

Setting Item Setting Values and Descriptions

“MIDI” > “Keyboard Ch”

The keyboard channel is the MIDI channel that performance

data of the Digital Piano is transmitted on to external devices.

Set between 01 (default) and 16.

“MIDI” > “Local Control”

Using the Local Control setting, you can disconnect the

Digital Piano’s keyboard from the internal ‘local’ sound

source so that MIDI data is only output to an external

instrument. The initial default setting is “On”. When set to

“Off”, the Digital Piano outputs performance data (MIDI data),

but the Digital Piano itself does not produce any sound.

“MIDI” > “Hi-Reso MIDI Out”

Switches High Resolution Velocity MIDI Out on/off. Sets

whether the key-on and key-off velocities are output as high-

resolution MIDI output.

• When set to on, high-resolution velocity information

compatible with the high-resolution velocity MIDI standard

is sent to the MIDI OUT port.

• When set to off, high-resolution velocity data is not sent to

the MIDI OUT port. (Standard 127-step velocity data is

sent to the MIDI OUT port.)

• Turning this setting on/off only affects the data sent to the

MIDI OUT port. The Digital Piano’s built-in sound source

always uses high-resolution velocity data.

EN-149

The included Wireless MIDI & Audio Adaptor can be used to wirelessly connect the Digital Piano to

external devices. This connection uses Bluetooth

wireless technology, and the following two types of

connections are possible:

• Bluetooth Low Energy MIDI connection … Transmits MIDI data between the Digital Piano and a

smart device.

• Bluetooth audio connection … The Digital Piano produces the sound for playback of audio from the

external device.

* This requires the dedicated app (page EN-155) to be installed.

You can check the wireless connection status by referring to the indicator in the upper right corner of

the top screen.

....Lights while connected to a Bluetooth Low Energy MIDI-compatible device.

....Lights while connected to a Bluetooth audio-compatible device.

The wireless functionality of this Digital Piano is turned on under the initial default settings. The wireless

functionality can be turned off when necessary, such as when you do not want the Digital Piano to send

out a signal.

Select the “04 Listening” of the F button set. See “To change the F Button Set”

(page EN-32).

• When the wireless functionality is on, the F1 button (ADPTR) in the F button menu is

surrounded by brackets [ ]. In addition, the indicator lights according to the status of the wireless

connection. For more information, see “Checking the Wireless Connection Status” (page

EN-149).

Wireless Connections

Configuring Wireless (Bluetooth) Connection Settings

Checking the Wireless Connection Status

Enabling and Disabling the Digital Piano’s Wireless Function

Wireless Connections

EN-150

Touch the F1 button (ADPTR).

The wireless functionality turns off.

• Touching the F1 button (ADPTR) toggles the wireless functionality on and off.

A change in the Bluetooth connection causes a notification tone to sound.

■ To adjust the notification tone volume level

Select the “04 Listening” of the F button set. See “To change the F Button Set”

(page EN-32).

Touch and hold the F1 button (ADPTR).

The “WIRELESS” screen appears.

Trace the touch ring to change the “Notification Vol” setting value.

• The volume can be changed to a value between 0 and 127.

Notification Tones

This type of connection: Sounds this notification tone:

Connection with a Bluetooth audio device Rising piano tone melody

Disconnection from a Bluetooth audio device Falling piano tone melody

Connection with a Bluetooth Low Energy MIDI device Rising vibraphone tone melody

Disconnection from a Bluetooth Low Energy MIDI device Falling vibraphone tone melody

Wireless Connections

EN-151

Connecting the Digital Piano and a smart device over a Bluetooth Low Energy MIDI connection enables

various actions using the dedicated app. For details about the dedicated app, see “About the App for

Smart Devices (CASIO MUSIC SPACE)” (page EN-155).

If the Digital Piano’s wireless functionality is turned off, turn it on.

• For more information, see “Enabling and Disabling the Digital Piano’s Wireless Function” (page

EN-149).

Plug the included Wireless MIDI & Audio Adaptor into the Digital Piano’s USB

Type A port.

Open the settings screen of the smart device and turn on the Bluetooth function

if it is off.

In the settings screen of the dedicated app installed on your smart device, select

“WU-BT10 MIDI”.

• Do not operate the Digital Piano while it is connecting to a smart device.

• When connected, the indicator appears in the upper right corner of the Digital Piano’s top

screen and a notification tone sounds.

• The procedure in Step 4 above is necessary every time you use the dedicated app.

• When this Digital Piano and an external device are connected via Bluetooth Low Energy MIDI and

Bluetooth audio simultaneously, MIDI functionality may become unstable depending on the type of

connected device, its OS version, etc. If this occurs, terminate the Bluetooth audio connection using

the external device.

Connecting the Digital Piano with a Bluetooth Low

Energy MIDI Device

USB Type A port

Wireless MIDI & Audio Adaptor

Wireless Connections

EN-152

Connecting this Digital Piano and an external device

over Bluetooth audio allows playback from the

external device over the Digital Piano’s speakers. To connect via Bluetooth audio, you must first

perform a procedure called “audio pairing” between the Digital Piano and the external device.

* External devices include Bluetooth audio-compatible smart devices (e.g., iPhones, iPads, Android

smartphones), iPods, MP3 players, etc.

Plug the included Wireless MIDI & Audio Adaptor into the Digital Piano’s USB

Type A port.

Open the settings screen of the external device and turn on the Bluetooth

function if it is off.

Select the “04 Listening” of the F button set. See “To change the F Button Set”

(page EN-32).

Touch and hold the F1 button (ADPTR).

The “WIRELESS” screen appears.

Use the touch ring to select “Audio Pairing” then touch the ENTER button.

“Pairing...” appears on the display of the Digital Piano, and it waits for the connection to be

established.

• If the Digital Piano’s wireless functionality is off, it will automatically turn on.

Connecting the Digital Piano with a Bluetooth Audio

Device

Pairing the Digital Piano with a Bluetooth Audio Device

USB Type A port

Wireless MIDI & Audio Adaptor

Wireless Connections

EN-153

Select “WU-BT10 AUDIO” on the Bluetooth settings screen of the external

device.

• When pairing is complete, the indicator appears in the upper right corner of the Digital

Piano’s top screen and a notification tone sounds.

• Information regarding the external device connected over Bluetooth audio is registered in the

Wireless MIDI & Audio Adaptor. After the first time, the Bluetooth audio connection will be

established automatically without the above procedure.

• If the Bluetooth audio connection cannot be established, try the following:

(1) Perform the operation described in “Deleting Bluetooth Audio Device Pairing Registration”

(page EN-153).

(2) If the pairing registration information with this Digital Piano remains on the external device,

delete it.

To do so, delete “WU-BT10 AUDIO” from the Bluetooth settings screen on the external device.

For details on how to do this, see the instruction manual of the external device.

(3) Redo the procedure described in “Pairing the Digital Piano with a Bluetooth Audio Device”

(page EN-152).

The following procedure will delete the pairing registration between this Digital Piano and the external

device connected over the Bluetooth audio connection.

• After performing the procedure below, you should also delete the Digital Piano pairing registration

information from external devices that have been connected to this Digital Piano via Bluetooth audio.

To do this, delete “WU-BT10 AUDIO” from the Bluetooth settings screen of the external device. For

details on how to do this, see the instruction manual of the external device.

Plug the included Wireless MIDI & Audio Adaptor into the USB Type A port.

• Bluetooth audio pairing registration information cannot be deleted unless connected.

Select the “04 Listening” of the F button set. See “To change the F Button Set”

(page EN-32).

Touch and hold the F1 button (ADPTR).

The “WIRELESS” screen appears.

Use the touch ring to select “Pairing Clear”, then touch the ENTER button.

A confirmation screen appears. To cancel the operation, touch the left of the touch ring (NO).

Deleting Bluetooth Audio Device Pairing Registration

Wireless Connections

EN-154

To delete the pairing registration information, touch the right of the touch ring

(YES).

“Complete” appears, and the display returns to the “WIRELESS” screen.

EN-155

This section describes the “CASIO MUSIC SPACE” dedicated app, which provides additional ways to

enjoy your Digital Piano.

You can use the following functions on the Digital Piano when linked with the “CASIO MUSIC SPACE”

dedicated app.

• Piano Roll

• Score Viewer

• Music Player

• Live Concert Simulator

• Piano Remote Controller

• Data Center

For details on each function, see the user’s manual of the dedicated app.

Follow the procedure below to use the dedicated app.

Install CASIO MUSIC SPACE on your smart device

• See the “Downloads” section of the website below.

https://support.casio.com/global/en/emi/manual/PX-S6000/

Using the Dedicated App

About the App for Smart Devices (CASIO MUSIC SPACE)

Using the Dedicated App

EN-156

Connect this Digital Piano to your smart device

The available features depends on the connection method.

Never connect the Digital Piano with a Bluetooth Low Energy MIDI device and a USB MIDI device

at the same time.

*1 Use this function to transfer user songs (page EN-106) to the Digital Piano.

*2 See “Connecting the Digital Piano with a Bluetooth Low Energy MIDI Device” (page EN-151).

*3 See “Connecting the Digital Piano with a Bluetooth Audio Device” (page EN-152).

*4 See “Connecting the Digital Piano with a Smart Device via USB MIDI” (page EN-161).

Available features

Wireless connection Cable connection

Bluetooth Low

Energy MIDI

connection

Bluetooth audio

connection

USB MIDI

connection

Piano Roll

✓ — ✓

Score Viewer

✓

(when using the pedal

to turn the page)

✓

(when using the pedal

to turn the page)

Music Player — ✓ —

Live Concert Simulator ✓✓✓

Piano Remote Controller ✓ — ✓

Data Center ✓ — ✓

EN-157

This section describes the connection methods that can be used without using the dedicated app (page

EN-155):

• Play sound from a smart device (Bluetooth audio connection)

Audio playback from a smart device or other Bluetooth audio-compatible device is played through the

Digital Piano’s speakers.

• Connect to a computer or smart device and use MIDI

MIDI data is transmitted between this Digital Piano and a computer or smart device.

• Output the sound of the Digital Piano to an amplifier or other audio equipment (LINE OUT jacks)

Sound from the Digital Piano is played though external equipment via the LINE OUT jacks using

cables.

Connecting this Digital Piano and a smart device

over Bluetooth audio allows playback from the smart

device over the Digital Piano’s speakers.

* In addition to smart devices, many Bluetooth audio-compatible devices (iPods, MP3 players, etc.)

can also be connected to this Digital Piano.

Perform audio pairing between this Digital Piano and a smart device (or other

Bluetooth audio-compatible device).

• See “Pairing the Digital Piano with a Bluetooth Audio Device” (page EN-152).

Play the song on the audio paired device.

See “Adjusting the Volume Level, Stereo Pan and Effects for Each Part” (page EN-65).

• By changing the setting value of “MIXER” > “VOLUME” > “Wireless Audio”, you can adjust the

playback volume of audio data relative to the overall volume.

• By changing the setting value of “MIXER” > “HALL/REV.” > “Wireless A Send”, you can adjust the

send value of the Hall Simulator/Reverb of the audio data.

Connecting with External Devices

Playing Sound from a Smart Device on This Digital Piano

(Bluetooth Audio Connection)

Playing Audio from a Smart Device or Other Bluetooth-compatible Device

on this Digital Piano

Adjusting the Volume Level or Effect Depth of Bluetooth Audio (MIXER

Settings)

Connecting with External Devices

EN-158

Turning on Audio Center Cancel cuts (reduces or eliminates) vocals in the playback sound. Since this

function cancels the central sound, it may also cut sounds other than vocals. Its effectiveness depends

on the input sound.

• The Audio Center Cancel (page EN-110) when playing back audio data in SONG mode on this

Digital Piano and the Center Cancel in this section differ in terms of settings.

■ To enable or disable Bluetooth audio center cancel

Select “04 Listening” from the F button set. See “To change the F Button Set”

(page EN-32).

Touch and hold the F1 button (ADPTR).

The “WIRELESS” screen appears.

Touch the top or bottom of the touch ring to select “Audio C Cancel”.

Trace the touch ring to toggle the setting value between “On” and “Off”.

Bluetooth Audio Center Cancel (Vocal Cut)

Connecting with External Devices

EN-159

You can send and receive performance information (MIDI data) by connecting the Digital Piano to a

computer or smart device. You can use music software on your computer or a smart device app to

record your performance, or to send MIDI data from your computer or a smart device to the Digital

Piano and play notes on the Digital Piano.

• For detailed MIDI specifications relating to this Digital Piano and the latest support information, visit

the CASIO website below.

https://support.casio.com/global/en/emi/manual/PX-S6000/

• For MIDI-related settings, see “Configuring MIDI Settings” (page EN-148).

■ Minimum Computer System Requirements

The minimum computer system requirements for sending and receiving MIDI data are shown below.

Check to make sure that your computer complies with these requirements before connecting the Digital

Piano to it.

• USB port

• Operating System

Windows 10

Windows 11

macOS 10.15, 11, 12, 13

* Windows 10 (32-bit, 64-bit)

• For the latest OS support information, please see the “Operating System Compatibility (Windows/

macOS)” section on our website below.

https://support.casio.com/global/en/emi/manual/PX-S6000/

Using MIDI with a Connected Computer or Smart Device

Connecting the Digital Piano with a Computer via USB MIDI

Connecting with External Devices

EN-160

■ To connect the Digital Piano with your computer

• Make sure you follow the steps of the procedure below exactly. Connecting incorrectly can

make data send and receive impossible.

• Be sure to turn on the Digital Piano first before starting up your computer’s music software.

• USB send and receive is disabled during playback of a song.

Turn off the Digital Piano and start up the computer.

• Do not start any music software yet on your computer.

Connect the USB Type B port of the Digital Piano to your computer using a

commercially available USB cable.

• Use a USB 2.0 or 1.1 A-B connector type cable.

Turn on the Digital Piano.

• When connecting for the first time, the driver required to send and receive data is automatically

installed on the computer.

Start the (commercially available) music software on your computer.

Select “CASIO USB-MIDI” as the MIDI device in the settings of your computer’s

music software.

• Refer to the user manual of the music software for information on how to select a MIDI device.

• After one successful connection, the USB cable can be left connected and the computer or the

Digital Piano can be turned on again.

Computer port Connection cable

Digital Piano

port

USB Type A

USB Type B

Connecting with External Devices

EN-161

■ Smart Device Operating Environment

You can use MIDI standard apps when the Digital Piano is connected with a smart device.

For a list of devices that can be used, please see the “Operating System Compatibility (iOS/Android)”

section on the CASIO website below.

https://support.casio.com/global/en/emi/manual/PX-S6000/

• We recommend using devices listed in the “Tested devices (USB-MIDI connection)” section.

• Please note that listed devices are not guaranteed to work with all MIDI apps running on the device.

• Depending on the operating environment, it may not be possible to connect correctly.

• Even if the device has been tested, it may not work properly due to device or OS version upgrades,

etc.

■ To connect the Digital Piano with your smart device

• Be sure to use a USB cable that supports data transfer.

• A USB cable exclusively for charging cannot be used for data transfer.

Turn on the Digital Piano and the smart device.

Connect the smart device to the USB Type B port of the Digital Piano using a

connection cable.

iPhone/iPad users

Connecting the Digital Piano with a Smart Device via USB MIDI

Device port Connection cable

Digital Piano

port

Lightning

Apple Lightning -

USB camera adaptor

USB cable

(A-B type)

USB Type B

USB Type C

Apple USB Type C -

USB adaptor

USB cable

(A-B type)

Connecting with External Devices

EN-162

Android users

Launch the MIDI-compatible app on your smart device.

• If you are using CASIO’s dedicated app, the smart device screen will display “Connecting...”.

When a successful connection is made, the message “Connected” will be displayed.

Device port Connection cable

Digital Piano

port

USB Type C

USB Type C -

USB adaptor

USB cable

(A-B type)

USB cable (C-B type)

USB Type B

USB Micro-B

USB OTG cable

(micro B-A type)

USB cable

(A-B type)

Connecting with External Devices

EN-163

You can connect audio equipment or a music amplifier to the Digital Piano and then play through

external speakers for more powerful volume and better sound quality. Use commercially available cable

for connection.

• Turn off the external device when making connections. After connecting, turn down the

Digital Piano and external device volume levels to their minimum whenever turning power on

or off.

• After connecting, turn on the Digital Piano and then the external device.

• If keyboard notes are distorted when they are sounded from external audio equipment, lower

the Digital Piano’s volume setting.

LINE OUT R jack output is right channel sound, while LINE OUT L/MONO jack output is left

channel sound. Use commercially available cables to connect the external audio equipment to the

Digital Piano’s LINE OUT jacks as shown in the figure below. Normally in this configuration you must

set the audio equipment’s input selector to the setting that specifies the terminal (such as AUX IN) to

which the Digital Piano is connected.

Outputting Digital Piano Notes Through an Amplifier or

Audio Equipment (LINE OUT jacks)

Connecting to Audio Equipment

Audio amplifier AUX IN jacks, etc.

Pin plugs

LINE OUT jacks

(Standard phone jack (TS phone))

RIGHT (Red)

LEFT (White)

Connecting with External Devices

EN-164

Connecting to the LINE OUT L/MONO jack only outputs a mixture of both channels. Use

commercially available cable to connect the amplifier to the Digital Piano’s LINE OUT L/MONO jack

as shown in the figure below.

Connecting to a Musical Instrument Amplifier

INPUT 1

INPUT 2

LINE OUT L/MONO jacks

(Standard phone jack (TS phone))

Guitar amplifier

Keyboard amplifier, etc.

EN-165

All system contents, including data and settings, can be reset to their initial factory defaults.

■ To return all Digital Piano settings and data to their initial factory defaults (Factory

Reset)

• Performing the following will also delete user songs, MIDI recorder songs, registration data

and user F button sets. We recommend saving important data on a USB flash drive (page

EN-143).

Touch the FUNCTION button to display the FUNCTION menu.

Using the touch ring, select “SYSTEM” > “Factory Reset”.

Touch the ENTER button.

A confirmation screen will appear. To cancel the operation, touch the left of the touch ring (NO).

To restore the Digital Piano to its initial factory defaults, touch the right of the

touch ring (YES).

This restarts the Digital Piano, and then the display returns to the top screen.

■ To return all Digital Piano settings to their initial factory defaults (Setting Reset)

This function allows you to restore all settings of the Digital Piano to the initial factory defaults. This

operation resets only the settings and does not delete user songs, MIDI recorder songs or registration

data.

In step 2 of “To return all Digital Piano settings and data to their initial factory defaults (Factory Reset)”

(page EN-165), select “Setting Reset” instead of “Factory Reset”.

Deleting All Data in the Digital Piano’s Internal

Memory

EN-166

● The touch button does not respond.

● No sound is produced when the keyboard keys are pressed.

● The pitch sounds wrong.

Troubleshooting

Reason: a. The buttons were touched with a fingernail or stylus.

The button was touched by a user wearing a glove that is not suitable for use with

touch buttons.

b. The sensitivity of the touch buttons is set too low.

Solution: a. Touch the buttons firmly with bare fingers.

b. Change the sensitivity setting of the touch buttons. See “Setting the Sensitivity of

the Touch Buttons and Touch Ring” (page EN-26).

Reason: a. The volume has been turned down with the volume knob.

b. Headphones are connected. A headphone conversion plug has been left in the

PHONES jack.

c. “Speaker Out” (page EN-20) is set to “Off”.

d. Local control setting is off.

e. The position of the expression pedal connected to the Digital Piano is at the position

where it stops when depressed toward the heel (the minimum value).

Solution: a. Turn the volume knob.

b. Unplug the headphones or conversion plug from the PHONES jack.

c. Set “Speaker Out” to “Auto” or “On”.

d. Turn on the Local Control (page EN-148) setting.

e. If the “Expression” or “Master Vol” function is assigned to the expression pedal,

sound will not be produced when the pedal is in the minimum value heel position.

Press the pedal down toward the toe to increase the volume.

Reason: a. The keyboard transpose setting has been changed from its initial value.

b. The master tuning setting is set to a frequency other than 440.0 Hz.

c. Octave Shift is enabled.

d. The Scale Tuning is set to something other than equal temperament.

e. The pitch bend wheel is not centered.

Solution: a. Reset transpose (page EN-130) to its initial value or turn the power off and then on

again.

b. Set tuning (page EN-130) to 440.0 Hz. Or turn the power off and then on again.

c. Set octave shift (page EN-132) to “0”.

d. Set the Scale Tuning (page EN-133) to “equal temperament”.

e. Make sure nothing is touching the pitch bend wheel.

Troubleshooting

EN-167

● The pedal has no effect.

● The sound does not become louder or softer depending on how I play (touch).

● The sound tone, effects, etc. do not change even after turning the power off and then back on

(the Digital Piano does not return to its initial default settings).

● When connected to a computer, MIDI cannot be sent or received.

● Some tones are the same but have slightly different sound quality and volume depending on

the keyboard position.

● When the buttons are pressed, the sound that is being played is temporarily interrupted or the

sound quality becomes slightly different.

Reason: a. The pedal cable is not properly plugged into the PEDAL UNIT or EXPRESSION/

ASSIGNABLE jack. Or the plug is incompletely plugged in.

b. The pedal type assignment or function assignment to the jack to which the pedal is

connected is incorrect.

Solution: a. Check that the pedal cable is properly connected and that the plug is firmly inserted

into the jack.

b. Change to the correct settings. See “EXPRESSION/ASSIGNABLE jack” (page

EN-68).

Reason: “Touch Response” (page EN-128) is set to “Off”.

Solution: Set “Touch Response” to a setting other than “Off”.

Reason: “Auto Resume” (page EN-17) is set to “On”.

Solution: Turn “Auto Resume” to “Off” and turn the power off and then back on.

Solution: a. Check that the Digital Piano is properly connected to the computer with a USB

cable and that the Digital Piano is correctly selected in the settings of the

computer’s music software.

b. Try turning off the Digital Piano and closing the music software on the computer,

then turn on the Digital Piano and restart the music software on the computer.

Reason: This is not a malfunction, but a result of an electronic process called digital sampling

* A process whereby several tone registers (low, mid, high, etc.) of the original

instrument are recorded to capture the sound quality in each of the original

instrument sound registers. The samples are then processed to create a single tone.

Reason: When using the Layer function, Duet function, song playback, or recording function,

multiple parts sound at the same time. Pressing the buttons in such cases will

automatically change the internal effect settings specific to the tone and may cause

this phenomenon to occur in some parts, but it is not a malfunction.

Troubleshooting

EN-168

Error Messages

Display Cause Action

Limit

Recording of 1,000 measures or over

was attempted with the MIDI recorder.

Use the MIDI recorder to record up to

bar 999.

The recording time limit was reached

with the audio recorder.

Use the audio recorder to record up to

approximately 25 minutes.

Memory Full

The per-song capacity (320KB) of the

MIDI recorder was reached.

Record within the per-song capacity.

Data Full

The five-song limit was reached with the

MIDI recorder.

Delete a song (page EN-119).

No Media

The USB flash drive is not properly

plugged into the USB Type A port on

the Digital Piano.

Plug the USB flash drive correctly into

the USB Type A port.

The USB flash drive was removed or

inserted during the operation.

Do not touch the USB flash drive during

operation of the Digital Piano.

The USB flash drive is protected. Unprotect the USB flash drive.

The USB flash drive contains antivirus

software.

Use a USB flash drive that does not

contain antivirus software.

No File

There are no loadable/playable files in

the “MUSICDAT” folder.

Move the file you want to load or play to

the “MUSICDAT” folder (page EN-143).

No Data

An attempt was made to save a song

number to the USB flash drive for which

there was no recorded data.

Select a song number that has already

been recorded.

Read Only

An attempt was made to save different

data with the same name as a read-only

file on the USB flash drive.

• Change the name to something else

and save it.

• Remove the read-only attribute from

the file on the USB flash drive and

overwrite the file.

• Use a different USB flash drive.

Not Enough

Memory

If this error appears, there is not enough

free space on the USB flash drive.

Either delete the files stored on the USB

flash drive to free up more space or use

a different USB flash drive.

Troubleshooting

EN-169

* Audio recorder songs are saved with the name “TAKE**” (** is 01 to 99). Whenever recording, data is

automatically created by adding 1 to the highest number of ** in the USB flash drive. Therefore, if

“TAKE99” in the SONG mode screen is marked with “ ” (data of “TAKE99” exists), recording will not

be able to start.

Too Many Files

When recording with the audio recorder,

an attempt was made to start recording

beyond the maximum number of songs

(99), or there is a file called

TAKE99.WAV in the “MUSICDAT”

folder of the USB flash drive.

Use a computer to delete all or some of

TAKE01.WAV to TAKE99.WAV in the

“MUSICDAT” folder or move them to

another folder or drive. When deleting

or moving only some files, give priority

to files with higher numbers

Not SMF 0/1

An attempt was made to read or play a

file in SMF format 2.

The SMF format that can be read and

played back by the Digital Piano is “0” or

“1”.

Large Size

The size of the SMF file on the USB

flash drive is too large to play on this

Digital Piano.

The Digital Piano can play back SMF

files up to a maximum size of

approximately 320 KB.

Wrong Data

Data on the USB flash drive is

corrupted.

—

Version

The version of the file on the USB flash

drive is not the version supported by

this Digital Piano.

Use a version of the file that is

supported by the Digital Piano.

Format

The format of the USB flash drive is not

compatible with this Digital Piano.

Use a computer or other device to

change the USB flash drive to a format

compatible with this Digital Piano (page

EN-142).

Use another USB flash drive.

The USB flash drive is corrupted. Use another USB flash drive.

No Wireless

Adptr

The Wireless MIDI & Audio Adaptor is

not plugged into the USB Type A port.

Plug the Wireless MIDI & Audio Adaptor

into the USB Type A port.

Display Cause Action

EN-170

Reference

Product Specifications

Model PX-S6000BK

Keyboard 88-key piano keyboard

Settings Hammer Response, Key Off Response

Duet Adjustable tone range (–2 to +2 octaves)

Transpose –12 to 0 to +12 semitones

Octave Shift –2 to 0 to +2 octaves

Sound Source

Number of Tones 350, Layer, Split

Maximum Polyphony 256 notes

Touch Response 5 sensitivity levels, Off

Tuning 415.5Hz to 440.0Hz to 465.9Hz (0.1Hz units)

Temperament Equal temperament plus 16 other types

Piano Position 4 types

Acoustic Simulator

Key Off Simulator, String Resonance, Damper Resonance,

Damper Noise, Key On Action Noise, Key Off Action Noise

Sound Mode Hall simulator (8 types), Reverb (8 types), Surround (3 types)

DSP Built-in to each tone + 100 presets, editable

Effects Chorus (12 types), Brilliance (–12 to 0 to +12)

Microphone Effect 25 types, editable effect parameter settings

Mixer Volume, Pan, Hall Simulator/Reverb Send,

Hall Simulator/Reverb Return, Chorus Send

Demo Song 3

Playback Function (SONG

Mode)

In the MIDI Mode Playable songs: User song

(SMF

, CMF

), MIDI recorder song

(MRF

), song data stored on USB flash drive (SMF

, CMF

)

Playback parts: L+R, L, R

(playback of both tracks at the same time or each track independently)

In the Audio Mode Playable songs: audio recorder song (WAV

), general audio file

(WAV

, MP3

)

Playback functions: Center cancel

Song Volume Adjustable (MIDI Mode and Audio Mode individually)

MIDI Recorder Real-time recording and playback as MIDI data

Number of Songs 5

File Format MRF

Number of Tracks 2

Capacity Approximately 30,000 notes per song (total of two tracks)

Recording Medium Internal memory (built-in flash memory)

Reference

EN-171

Audio Recorder Real-time recording and playback as audio data

Number of Songs 99 (files)

File Format WAV

Maximum Recording Time Approximately 25 minutes per file

Recording Medium USB flash drive

Arpeggiator 50 types

Metronome

Beat Bell Off, 1 to 9 (beats)

Drum Patterns 20 types

Tempo Range 20 to 255

Tempo Markings

9 types

Metronome Volume Level Adjustable

Registration Function 96 sets maximum (4 sets, 24 banks)

Pedals

PEDAL UNIT jack For connection of a separately available pedal unit

Damper (continuously variable), sostenuto (off, on), soft (off, on)

EXPRESSION/

ASSIGNABLE jack

For connection of the included sustain pedal (SP-3), a commercially

available expression pedal or a separately available CASIO sustain

pedal, selectable function (expression, master volume, tempo, layer

balance, damper (off, on), sostenuto (off, on), soft (off, on), arpeggio

hold (off, on), play/stop, sequential recall of setup registrations)

Other Functions Auto Resume, Operation Lock

MIDI MIDI 16-channel multi-timbre receive; GM Level 1 standard

Pitch Bend Wheel Pitch bend range: 0 to 24 semitones

Knobs 2 (function-assignable knobs)

CONTROL Button 1 (function-assignable button)

Inputs/Outputs

PHONES jack Stereo standard phone jack (TRS phone) × 1,

Stereo mini phone jack (Mini TRS phone) × 1

Power 24V DC

LINE OUT R, L/MONO

jacks

Standard phone jack (TS phone) × 2 (Output impedance: 470 Ω,

Output voltage: 1.7 V (RMS) MAX)

MIC IN jack Standard phone jack (TS phone) (Input impedance: 3 kΩ,

Input voltage: 10 mV)

USB Ports Type A, Type B

EXPRESSION/

ASSIGNABLE jack

Stereo standard phone jack (TRS phone)

PEDAL UNIT jack Proprietary jack

Acoustics

Amp output 8 W × 2 + 8 W × 2 (3 W × 2 + 3 W × 2 under battery power)

Speakers 16 cm × 8 cm (oval) × 2 + 16 cm × 8 cm (oval) × 2

Reference

EN-172

*1 Storage of up to 10 songs in the internal memory, up to approximately 320KB per song (Based on

1KB = 1024 bytes, 1MB = 1024

bytes)

*2 Standard MIDI file (SMF format 0/1, file name extension: .MID)

*3 CASIO original file format. This file format adds CASIO proprietary data to MIDI data. (file name

extension: .CMF)

*4 MIDI Recorder song file (file name extension: .MRF)

*5 WAV format audio file (Linear PCM, 16-bit, 44.1kHz, stereo, file name extension: .WAV)

*6 MP3 format audio file (MPEG-1 Audio Layer3, 44.1kHz/48kHz, 32-320kbps variable bit rate (VBR),

monaural/stereo, file name extension: .MP3)

*7 Measured values while using eneloop batteries.

eneloop is a registered trademark of Panasonic Group.

• Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.

Power Supply 2-way

Batteries 8 AA-size alkaline batteries or AA-size rechargeable nickel metal

hydride batteries

Battery Continuous

Operation

Approximately 4 hours (alkaline batteries), approximately 4 hours

(rechargeable nickel metal hydride batteries)

Actual continuous operation time may be shorter due to battery type

and performance type.

AC Adaptor AD-E24250LW

Auto Power Off Approximately four hours (under AC adaptor power) or six minutes

(under battery power) after last operation, can be disabled.

Power Consumption 24V = 20W

Dimensions 134.0 (W) × 24.2 (D) × 10.2 (H) cm

(52 3/4 × 9 1/2 × 4 inch)

Weight Approximately 14.8 kg (32.6 lbs) (Excluding batteries)

Reference

EN-173

■ Environment

• Place the Digital Piano onto a stable and flat surface. If you want to place the Digital Piano on a table

or other surface instead of a separately available stand, place it on a stable and flat surface where

the entire bottom of the Digital Piano fits within that surface.

• To prevent the formation of mold, set up the product in a well-ventilated location where the

temperature and humidity ranges shown below are maintained.

– Recommended temperature range: 15 to 25°C

– Recommended humidity range: 40 to 60% RH

• Do not set up the product in locations subject to extreme variations in temperature and/or humidity.

Doing so can cause metal components to rust, coatings to degrade, and components to warp and

split.

■ User Maintenance

• Wipe the product with a soft, dry cloth. Do not use a tissue, which can cause scratching.

• When soiling is more serious, moisten a soft cloth with a weak solution of water and a mild neutral

detergent, wring out all excess moisture from the cloth, and then wipe the product. After that, wipe

again with a separate soft dry cloth.

• Do not use any cleaning agents, chlorine disinfectants, sanitizing wipes, or other items that include

benzene, organic solvents, alcohol, or other solvents for cleaning. Doing so can cause discoloration,

deformation, paint peeling, cracking, etc.

■ Sterilization and Disinfection

• After wiping the product two or three times with a non-alcohol sanitizing wipe, use a soft, dry cloth to

wipe it dry.

• Note that failure to wipe the product dry can cause streaks to remain.

• If the product is used by multiple parties, hand disinfection before each use is recommended.

■ Included and Optional Accessories

Use only accessories that are specified for use with this product. Use of unauthorized accessories

creates the risk of fire, electric shock, and personal injury.

■ Weld Lines

Lines may be visible on the exterior of the product. These are “weld lines” that result from the plastic

molding process. They are not cracks or scratches.

■ AC Adaptor Handling Precautions

• Never connect the AC adaptor (JEITA Standard, with unified polarity plug) that is specified with this

Digital Piano to any other device besides this Digital Piano.

Doing so creates the risk of malfunction.

• The AC adaptor cannot be repaired. If your AC adaptor malfunctions or becomes damaged, contact

your original retailer or a CASIO Service Center.

• AC adaptor operating environment: Temperature: 0 to 40°C

Humidity: 10% to 90% RH

• Output polarity: &

• Use of a different type AC adaptor can cause smoking or malfunction.

Operating Precautions

Reference

EN-174

■ Using Batteries

• Close the battery case lid before using the Digital Piano. Failing to do so may cause injury.

• Note that the rear of the Digital Piano around the battery compartment may become hot in

use.

■ Rechargeable Batteries

Note the precautions below when using rechargeable batteries.

(Models that support use of rechargeable batteries only)

• Use Panasonic Group AA-size eneloop rechargeable batteries.

Do not use any other type of batteries.

• Use only the specified charger to charge batteries.

• Rechargeable batteries must be removed from the product for charging.

• For information about using eneloop batteries or their specified charger, be sure to read the user

documentation and precautions that come with each item, and use them only as directed.

Be sure to replace batteries at least once a year, even if there is no indication of low battery power.

Dead rechargeable batteries (eneloop) in particular may deteriorate if they are left in the product.

Remove rechargeable batteries from the product as soon as possible after they go dead.

■ About the front panel

Operating the front panel when it is dusty or dirty may scratch it.

Gently wipe the panel with a soft, clean cloth to remove dust and dirt before use.

Use your fingers to operate the front panel. Using fingernails or sharp objects may scratch the surface.

■ Moving or Installing the Product

When installing or moving this product, be sure to pick it up from below using both hands. Particularly

on models with a stand, this product should always be moved by two adults holding the product level

with one person at each end, after first disconnecting any cables.

Failure to do so could result in personal injury to those around you, the product being dropped, or other

unexpected accidents.

Reference

EN-175

■ Plugging In and Unplugging the Product

• Grasp the base of the plug and keep it level as you push it into or pull it out of the socket.

• Do not unplug it by pulling on the cord.

• Before moving this product, be sure to unplug it from the socket.

Failure to do so could result in an accident or fault.

Reference

EN-176

Listed below are all FUNCTION menu item names and setting values and references in this manual.

Some menu items can be called up directly at the touch of a button. The following information is

provided in the “Reference” column of the table below, in the following manner.

• Items below that start with “◆” indicate a button operation.

• Names enclosed in brackets [ ], such as “[WHEEL]”, are the display name of the F button (page

EN-94).

• “FUNCTION + F1” indicates “while touching the FUNCTION button, touch the F1 button”.

While touching the FUNCTION button, touch either up, down, left, or right of the touch ring to recall the

initial value of each menu item.

FUNCTION Menu Items

Menu Item Setting Values Reference

SOUND “Applying Effects” (page EN-49)

ACOUSTIC SIM.

“Adjusting Acoustic Piano Sound

Characteristics (Acoustic Simulator)”

(page EN-59)

(◆[ACSIM])

String Reso.

Tone, Off, 1 - 10

“List of Acoustic Piano Sound Setting Items”

(page EN-60)

Damper Reso.

Damper Noise

Key On Noise

Key Off Noise

EFFECT (◆[EFECT])

Chorus Type Tone, other options

“Using Chorus (Chorus, Flanger, Short Delay)”

(page EN-57)

Brilliance –12 - 0 - +12 “Adjusting Brilliance” (page EN-58)

SOUND MODE

“Using the Sound Mode Effects (Hall

Simulator/Reverb and Surround)”

(page EN-49)

(◆Touch and hold [SMODE])

Sound Mode

Off, Hall/Rev., Surround,

Hall/Rev. + Srnd

“Enabling or Disabling the Hall Simulator/

Reverb and Surround Effects” (page EN-49)

(◆[SMODE])

Hall/Rev. Type Options

“Specifying the Hall Simulator/Reverb Type”

(page EN-50)

Surund Type Type 1 - Type 3 “Specifying the Surround Type” (page EN-51)

DSP

“Configuring DSP Settings” (page EN-53)

(◆Touch and hold [DSP])

DSP Type Options

“Selecting a DSP Type” (page EN-53)

DSP On/Off On, Off

“Configuring DSP Settings” (page EN-53)

M1 - M4 Options

Reference

EN-177

PIANO POSITION (◆[PPOSI])

Piano Position

Standard, Wall, Center,

Table

“Selecting the Piano Position Setting”

(page EN-38)

MIC FX (◆Touch and hold [MICFX])

Mic Fx Type Options

“Specifying the Microphone Effect Type”

(page EN-62)

Fx On/Off On, Off

“Changing Microphone Effect Settings”

(page EN-63)

M1 – M3 Options

MIXER

“Using the Mixer” (page EN-65)

(◆[MIXER])

VOLUME

“Adjusting the Volume Level, Stereo Pan and

Effects for Each Part” (page EN-65)

KB Group

0 - 127 “List of Mixer Setting Items” (page EN-66)

U1 Part

U2 Part

L Part

Audio Song

Wireless Audio

Mic In

MIDI Song

PAN

“Adjusting the Volume Level, Stereo Pan and

Effects for Each Part” (page EN-65)

U1 Part

–64 - 0 - +63 “List of Mixer Setting Items” (page EN-66)

U2 Part

L Part

Mic In

HALL/REV.

“Adjusting the Volume Level, Stereo Pan and

Effects for Each Part” (page EN-65)

Hall/Rev. Return

0 - 127

“List of Mixer Setting Items” (page EN-66)

U1 Part Send

U2 Part Send

L Part Send

AudioSongSend

0 - 127Wireless A Send

Mic In Send

Menu Item Setting Values Reference

Reference

EN-178

CHORUS

“Adjusting the Volume Level, Stereo Pan and

Effects for Each Part” (page EN-65)

U1 Part Send

0 - 127 “List of Mixer Setting Items” (page EN-66)U2 Part Send

L Part Send

KEYBOARD (◆[KEYBD])

TRANSPOSE —

Transpose –12 - 0 - +12

“Changing the Pitch in Semitone Steps

(Transpose)” (page EN-130)

(◆[TRANS])

KBD SETTING —

Touch Response

Off, Light 2, Light 1,

Normal, Heavy 1,

Heavy 2

“Changing Touch Response Sensitivity”

(page EN-127)

Hammer Response

Tone, Off, 1 - 10

“Adjusting the Hammer Response”

(page EN-128)

KeyOff Response Tone, 1 - 3

“Adjusting the Key-off Response”

(page EN-129)

PART OCT SHIFT —

Upper1 Part

–2 - 0 - +2

“Using Octave Shift Separately for Each Part

(Upper 1/Upper 2/Lower)” (page EN-132)

Upper2 Part

Lower Part

PART FINE TUNE —

Upper1 Part

–99 - 0 - +99

“Adjusting the Tuning Separately for Each Part

(Upper 1/Upper 2/Lower) (Part Fine Tune)”

(page EN-131)

Upper2 Part

Lower Part

SCALE TUNING

“Changing the Scale Tuning (Temperament)

of the Keyboard” (page EN-133)

Scale Type Options

“Changing the Scale” (page EN-133)

Scale Base Note C, C{, ... , B}, B

Stretch Tuning Off, On

“Enabling or Disabling Piano Stretch Tuning”

(page EN-134)

SPLIT POINT “Changing the Split Point” (page EN-47)

Split Point A0 - C8 (◆Touch and hold [SPLIT])

Menu Item Setting Values Reference

Reference

EN-179

PEDAL/WHEEL

“Changing the Sound During a Performance”

(page EN-67)

EXP/ASGN. PEDAL

“EXPRESSION/ASSIGNABLE jack”

(page EN-68)

(◆[PEDAL])

Pedal Type

SW, Exp.Type1,

Exp.Type2

“To specify the pedal type” (page EN-68)

Pedal Target Options

“To specify the pedal function” (page EN-69)

Upper1 Part

Off, On

“Enabling/Disabling the Pedal Operation for

Each Part (Upper 1/Upper 2/Lower)”

(page EN-71)

Upper2 Part

Lower Part

Exp Calibration — “Expression Pedal Calibration” (page EN-70)

PEDAL UNIT “PEDAL UNIT jack” (page EN-67)

Upper1 Part

Off, On

“Enabling/Disabling the Pedal Operation for

Each Part (Upper 1/Upper 2/Lower)”

(page EN-71)

Upper2 Part

Lower Part

WHEEL

“Using the Pitch Bend Wheel” (page EN-79)

(◆[WHEEL])

P Bend Range 0 - 24

“Changing the Pitch Bend Range”

(page EN-79)

Upper1 Part

Off, On

“Enabling/Disabling the Pitch Bend Wheel

Operation for Each Part (Upper 1/Upper 2/

Lower)” (page EN-80)

Upper2 Part

Lower Part

KNOB

“Using the Knobs” (page EN-72)

(◆[KNOB])

K1 Assign

Options

(◆FUNCTION + K1)

K2 Assign (◆FUNCTION + K2)

Menu Item Setting Values Reference

Reference

EN-180

CONTROL

“Selecting the Function Assigned to the

CONTROL Button” (page EN-77)

(◆[CTRL])

Control Assign Options

“Selecting the Function Assigned to the

CONTROL Button” (page EN-77)

(◆FUNCTION + CONTROL)

Mod Value 0 - 127

“To change the Modulation settings”

(page EN-78)

Mod Upper1 Part

Off, On

Mod Upper2 Part

Mod Lower Part

F BUTTON SETTING “Editing an F Button Set” (page EN-95)

FB SET NAME EDIT

“Changing the Name of an F Button Set”

(page EN-100)

F BUTTON EDIT

F1 {function}

Options

(◆FUNCTION + F1)

“Assigning a

Function to an F

Button (Creating a

User F Button Set)”

(page EN-95)

F2 {function} (◆FUNCTION + F2)

F3 {function} (◆FUNCTION + F3)

F4 {function} (◆FUNCTION + F4)

FB SET CLEAR “Erasing an F Button Set” (page EN-102)

DUET

“Splitting the Keyboard for Duet Play”

(page EN-135)

(◆Touch and hold [DUET])

Duet Mode Duet On, Duet Pan

“Configuring Duet Settings” (page EN-137)Upper Octave

–2 - 0 - +2

Lower Octave

ARPEGGIATOR —

Pattern Options

“Changing the Arpeggiator Pattern and Other

Settings” (page EN-84)

(◆Touch and hold [ARPEG])

Recommended

Setup

Off, On

Arpeggio Hold Off, On

Upper1 Part Off, On

Upper2 Part Off, On

Lower Part Off, On

Menu Item Setting Values Reference

Reference

EN-181

REGISTRATION

“Saving and Recalling Performance Setups

(Registration)” (page EN-86)

FREEZE

“Freeze Function” (page EN-90)

(◆Touch and hold [FREEZ])

Pedal/Wheel

Off, On “Registration Memory Data” (page EN-92)

Knob/CTRL

Scale Tuning

Touch Response

Sound Mode

Effect

Transpose

Split Point

Arpeggiator

Tempo

Tone

Mixer

BANK NAME EDIT

“Changing a Registration Bank Name”

(page EN-88)

SONG

“Listening to Songs (SONG Mode)”

(page EN-106)

Song Type MIDI, Audio (USB Drv)

“Playing Back MIDI Data or Audio Data”

(page EN-107)

(◆[STYPE])

Audio C Cancel Off, On

“Audio Center Cancel (Vocal Cut)”

(page EN-110)

(◆[STYPE])

METRONOME (◆[METRO])

Tempo 20 - 255

“Changing the Metronome Settings (Tempo,

Beat, Pattern, etc.)” (page EN-81)

Tempo Mark Options

Guide Type Metronome, Drum

Pattern

Bell Off, 1 Beat - 9 Beat /

Options

Volume 0 - 127

While Playing Off, On

While Recording Off, On

Menu Item Setting Values Reference

Reference

EN-182

MEDIA “USB Flash Drive” (page EN-138)

WIRELESS (◆Touch and hold [ADPTR])

Notification Vol 0 - 127 “Notification Tones” (page EN-150)

Audio Pairing —

“Pairing the Digital Piano with a Bluetooth

Audio Device” (page EN-152)

Pairing Clear —

“Deleting Bluetooth Audio Device Pairing

Registration” (page EN-153)

Audio C Cancel Off, On

“Bluetooth Audio Center Cancel (Vocal Cut)”

(page EN-158)

MIDI —

Keyboard Ch 1 - 16

“Configuring MIDI Settings” (page EN-148)Local Control Off, On

Hi-Reso MIDI Out

Off, On

SYSTEM —

Master Tuning 415.5 - 465.9

“Fine Tuning a Pitch (Master Tuning)”

(page EN-130)

Op. Click Volume

0 - 10

“Setting the Volume of the Sound Made When

the Touch Ring is Used (Operation Click

Volume)” (page EN-26)

Panel Light Off, 5, 30, 60,120

“Panel Lights Off”

(page EN-18)

Operation Lock Off, On, Auto

“Operation Lock” (page EN-22)

Speaker Out Off, On, Auto

“Outputting From the Speakers While

Headphones are Connected” (page EN-20)

Headphone Mode

Off, On “Headphone Mode” (page EN-20)

Auto Resume Off, On “Auto Resume” (page EN-17)

Auto Power Off Off, On “Auto Power Off” (page EN-17)

Power On Alert Off, On

“Power On Alert”

(page EN-18)

Battery Type Alkaline, Ni-MH “To select the Battery Type” (page EN-14)

Close-up Off, On “Close-Up Screen” (page EN-29)

LCD Contrast 1 - 17

“Adjusting Display Contrast” (page EN-19)

Menu Item Setting Values Reference

Reference

EN-183

*1 For a list of options, see the “Reference” listed to the right of each item.

*2 See “Microphone Effect Type List” (page EN-226).

*3 See “List of Effects in the Microphone Effects Module” (page EN-227).

*4 The software version of the device is displayed.

*5 See “Preset DSP List” (page EN-184)

*6 See “List of Effects in the DSP Modules” (page EN-187)

Touch Btn Sense –1, 0, +1

“Setting the Sensitivity of the Touch Buttons

and Touch Ring” (page EN-26)

Touch Ring Sense –3 - 0 - +3

“Setting the Sensitivity of the Touch Buttons

and Touch Ring” (page EN-26)

Setting Reset —

“To return all Digital Piano settings to their

initial factory defaults (Setting Reset)”

(page EN-165)

Factory Reset —

“To return all Digital Piano settings and data to

their initial factory defaults (Factory Reset)”

(page EN-165)

Version

——

Menu Item Setting Values Reference

Reference

EN-184

Listed below are the types of DSP and the effects contained in each module from M1 to M4 for each

type.

For more information on the effects listed in the M1 to M4 columns, see “List of Effects in the DSP

Modules” (page EN-187).

DSP List

Preset DSP List

No.

Preset DSP Name

(Display)

M1 M2 M3 M4

Mono 1BandEQ

Mono 1-Band EQ

Mono 2BandEQ

Mono 2-Band EQ

Mono 3BandEQ

Mono 3-Band EQ

4 Stereo1BndEQ

Stereo 1-Band EQ

5 Stereo2BndEQ

Stereo 2-Band EQ

6 Stereo3BndEQ

Stereo 3-Band EQ

7 Tone Control Tone Control

8 Compressor Compressor

9 Limiter Limiter

10 Enhancer Enhancer

11 Phaser Phaser

12 Chorus Chorus

13 Flanger Flanger

14 Tremolo Tremolo

15 Auto Pan Auto Pan

16 Rotary Rotary

17 Drive Rotary Drive Rotary

18 LFO Wah LFO Wah

19 Auto Wah Auto Wah

20 Modeling Wah Modeling Wah

21 Pitch PitchShifter

22 Ring Mod Ring Modulator

23 Piano Effect Piano Effect

24 Distortion Distortion

25 Drive Drive Tone Control

26 Mono IR Mono IR

27 Re-Amp 1 Compressor Mono IR Enhancer Tone Control

28 Re-Amp 2 Compressor Limiter Mono IR Delay

29 Re-Amp 3 Compressor Limiter Mono IR Delay

30 Re-Amp 4 Compressor Limiter Amp Cab Delay

Reference

EN-185

31 Re-Amp 5 Distortion Delay

32 Drive Amp 1

Mono 3-Band EQ

Drive Tone Control Mono IR

33 Drive Amp 2 Drive Tone Control Mono IR Tremolo

34 Drive Amp 3 Drive Tone Control Mono IR AutoPan

35 Drive Amp 4 Drive Tone Control Mono IR Phaser

36 Drive Amp 5 Drive Tone Control Mono IR Flanger

37 Drive Amp 6 Drive Tone Control Mono IR PitchShifter

38 OctaveDrvAmp PitchShifter Drive Tone Control Mono IR

39 PhaseDrvAmp Phaser Drive Tone Control Mono IR

40 DelayDrvAmp Drive Tone Control Mono IR Delay

41 Comp Amp 1 Compressoor Drive

Mono 1-Band EQ

Mono IR

42 Comp Amp 2 Drive Compressoor

Mono 1-Band EQ

Mono IR

43 Deley OD Amp Drive Enhancer Mono IR Delay

44 Wah Drv Amp Modeling Wah Drive Mono IR

45 DelayWahAmp LFO Wah Drive Mono IR Delay

46 Auto Wah Amp Auto Wah Drive Mono IR Delay

DriveAmpMod1

Drive Mono IR Phaser Flanger

DriveAmpMod2

LFO Wah Drive Mono IR Tremolo

49 S/H DriveAmp LFO Wah Drive Mono IR Auto Pan

50 PhaseDrvAmp2 Drive Mono IR Phaser Delay

51 FlngrDelyAmp Drive Mono IR Flanger Delay

52 PitchModAmp Drive Mono IR PitchShifter Delay

53 Drive Rotary Drive Rotary

54 DrvRotaryEQ Drive Rotary

Stereo 3-Band EQ

55 DrvRotaryPan Drive Rotary Auto Pan

56 PhaserAmpPan Drive Mono IR Phaser Auto Pan

57 FlangrAmpPan Drive Mono IR Flanger Auto Pan

58 ReflctAmpPan Drive Mono IR Reflection Auto Pan

59 DualDriveAmp Drive Drive Mono IR

60 DualDrvAmpDl Drive Drive Mono IR Delay

61 BassAmpAmbi Tone Control Compressor Mono IR Delay

62 Comp Ambi 1 Tone Control Compressor Enhancer Reflection

63 Comp Ambi 2 Tone Control Compressor Mono IR Delay

64 Comp Ambi 3 Drive Compressor Mono IR Delay

65 Comp Ambi 4 Drive Compressor Mono IR Delay

66 EnhanceAmbi1 Drive Enhancer Mono IR Delay

No.

Preset DSP Name

(Display)

M1 M2 M3 M4

Reference

EN-186

67 EnhanceAmbi2 Drive Reflection Mono IR Delay

68 Comp Mod 1 Tone Control Compressor Tremolo Tone Control

69 Comp Mod 2 Tone Control Compressor Phaser Reflection

70 Comp Mod 3 Compressor Flanger Phaser

71 Comp Mod 4 Compressor Tremolo Flanger Delay

72 VibraTremolo Mono IR

Mono 3-Band EQ

Vibraphone Tremolo

Reflection

73 EQ Mod 1 Tone Control Tone Control Phaser Mono IR

74 EQ Mod 2 Tone Control Flanger Tone Control Delay

75 EQ Mod 3 Tone Control Chorus Tone Control Delay

76 EQ Mod 4 Tone Control Tremolo Chorus Delay

77 Double Phase Mono IR Phaser Phaser Enhancer

78 DoubleFlang1 Mono IR Flanger Flanger Tone Control

79 DoubleFlang2 Mono IR Flanger Flanger Phaser

80 Tremolo Spin Tremolo Drive Rotary Tone Control

81 AmbientEnh 1 Enhancer Reflection Delay Tone Control

82 AmbientEnh 2 Tone Control Enhancer Reflection Delay

83 AmbientEnh 3 Tone Control Drive Mono IR Delay

84 AmbientEnh 4 Piano Effect Delay Tone Control

85 AmbientEnh 5 Enhancer Delay Tone Control

86 AmbientEnh 6 Drive Delay Tone Control

87 Pitch Delay Delay Pitch Phaser Auto Pan

88 ReflectDelay Reflection Enhancer Auto Pan Delay

89 Drive Delay Drive Delay Tone Control

90 Pitch Mod 1 Tone Control Phaser Delay Pitch

91 Pitch Mod 2 Pitch Delay Phaser Tone Control

92 Double Enhan Mono IR Enhancer Enhancer

93 Drive Enhan Drive Enhancer Enhancer

94 Reflection 1 Reflection Delay Tone Control

95 Reflection 2 Delay Reflection Enhancer Tone Control

96 Mod Tremolo Phaser Chorus Flanger Tremolo

97 Wah Phase LFO Wah Phaser Delay Tone Control

98 Wah Flanger Flanger Flanger LFO Wah Tone Control

99 Lo Cut EQ Tone Control Tone Control Tone Control

100 Stereo IR+EQ Reflect Stereo IR

Stereo 3-Band EQ

No.

Preset DSP Name

(Display)

M1 M2 M3 M4

Reference

EN-187

Listed below are all the effects included in the DSP modules.

For details on the parameters and setting ranges that can be set for each effect, see “Parameter List of

DSP Module Effects” (page EN-189).

List of Effects in the DSP Modules

Module

Number

Display

DSP Module

Name

Description



Mono 1BandEQ Mono 1-Band EQ This is a single-band monaural equalizer.



Mono 2BandEQ Mono 2-Band EQ This is a dual-band monaural equalizer.



Mono 3BandEQ Mono 3-Band EQ This is a three-band monaural equalizer.



Streo1BandEQ

Stereo 1-Band EQ

This is a single-band stereo equalizer.



Streo2BandEQ

Stereo 2-Band EQ

This is a dual-band stereo equalizer.



Streo3BandEQ

Stereo 3-Band EQ

This is a three-band stereo equalizer.



Tone Control Tone Control

Monaural tone control that adjusts low, mid, and high

frequencies.



Tremolo Tremolo Uses an LFO to shift the volume of the input signal.



Auto Pan Auto Pan Uses an LFO to shift the phase of the input signal.



Compressor Compressor

Compresses the input signal and suppresses level

variation.



Limiter Limiter

Limits the input signal level so it does not rise above

a preset level.



Enhancer Enhancer

Enhances the profiles of the low range and high

range of the input signal.



Phaser Phaser

Produces a distinctive pulsating, broad sound by

using an LFO to change the phase of the input signal

and then mixes it with the original input signal.



Chorus Chorus Gives notes depth and breadth.



Flanger Flanger

Applies wildly pulsating and metallic reverberation to

notes. Enables selection of the LFO waveform.



Rotary Rotary This effect is a rotary speaker simulator.



DriveRotary Drive Rotary

A rotary speaker simulator that makes overdrive

possible.



Pitch PitchShifter This effect transforms the pitch of the input signal.



Ring Mod Ring Modulator

Multiplies the input signal with an internal oscillator

signal to create a metallic sound.



Reflection Reflection

An effect that simulates the initial reflection of

reverberation. Applies acoustic ambiance and

presence to notes.



Delay Delay

Delays the input signal and feeds it back to create a

repeating effect.



Piano Effect Piano Effect An effect suited to acoustic piano play.



LFO Wah LFO Wah

“Wah” effect that can automatically affect the

frequency using an LFO.

Reference

EN-188



Auto Wah Auto Wah

“Wah” effect that can automatically shift the

frequency according to the input signal level.



Modeling Wah Modeling Wah

Simulates various types of wah pedals. An effect that

can automatically shift the frequency according to

the level of the input signal.



Distortion Distortion

Distortion, wah, and amp simulator combined into a

single effect.



Drive Drive Simulates the drive of a musical instrument amplifier.



Amp Cab Amp Cab

Simulates an amp without distortion-generating drive

and speaker cabinet.



VibraTremolo

Vibraphone Tremolo

An effect that simulates the tremolo effect of

vibraphone.



Mono IR Mono IR

Simulates the acoustic characteristics by monaural

IR (Impulse Response) data.



Stereo IR Stereo IR

Simulates the acoustic characteristics by stereo IR

(Impulse Response) data.

Module

Number

Display

DSP Module

Name

Description

Reference

EN-189

Parameter List of DSP Module Effects

Effect

Description Settings

Display

Parameter

Name



Mono 1-Band EQ This is a single-band monaural equalizer.

EQ Freq EQ Frequency Adjusts the center frequency of Equalizer.

(page EN-201)

EQ Gain EQ Gain Adjusts the gain of Equalizer. –12 - 00 - 12

Input Level Input Level Adjusts the input level. 000 - 127

Wet Level Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 - 127

Dry Level Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 - 127



Mono 2-Band EQ This is a dual-band monaural equalizer.

EQ1 Freq EQ1 Frequency Adjusts the center frequency of Equalizer 1.

(page EN-201)

EQ1 Gain EQ1 Gain Adjusts the gain of Equalizer 1. –12 - 00 - 12

EQ2 Freq EQ2 Frequency Adjusts the center frequency of Equalizer 2.

(page EN-201)

EQ2 Gain EQ2 Gain Adjusts the gain of Equalizer 2. –12 - 00 - 12

Input Level Input Level Adjusts the input level. 000 - 127

Wet Level Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 - 127

Dry Level Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 - 127



Mono 3-Band EQ This is a three-band monaural equalizer.

EQ1 Freq EQ1 Frequency Adjusts the center frequency of Equalizer 1.

(page EN-201)

EQ1 Gain EQ1 Gain Adjusts the gain of Equalizer 1. –12 - 00 - 12

EQ2 Freq EQ2 Frequency Adjusts the center frequency of Equalizer 2.

(page EN-201)

EQ2 Gain EQ2 Gain Adjusts the gain of Equalizer 2. –12 - 00 - 12

EQ3 Freq EQ3 Frequency Adjusts the center frequency of Equalizer 3.

(page EN-201)

EQ3 Gain EQ3 Gain Adjusts the gain of Equalizer 3. –12 - 00 - 12

Input Level Input Level Adjusts the input level. 000 - 127

Wet Level Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 - 127

Dry Level Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 - 127

Reference

EN-190



Stereo 1-Band EQ This is a single-band stereo equalizer.

EQ Freq EQ Frequency Adjusts the center frequency of Equalizer.

(page EN-201)

EQ Gain EQ Gain Adjusts the gain of Equalizer. –12 - 00 - 12

Input Level Input Level Adjusts the input level. 000 - 127

Wet Level Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 - 127

Dry Level Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 - 127



Stereo 2-Band EQ This is a dual-band stereo equalizer.

EQ1 Freq EQ1 Frequency Adjusts the center frequency of Equalizer 1.

(page EN-201)

EQ1 Gain EQ1 Gain Adjusts the gain of Equalizer 1. –12 - 00 - 12

EQ2 Freq EQ2 Frequency Adjusts the center frequency of Equalizer 2.

(page EN-201)

EQ2 Gain EQ2 Gain Adjusts the gain of Equalizer 2. –12 - 00 - 12

Input Level Input Level Adjusts the input level. 000 - 127

Wet Level Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 - 127

Dry Level Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 - 127



Stereo 3-Band EQ This is a three-band stereo equalizer.

EQ1 Freq EQ1 Frequency Adjusts the center frequency of Equalizer 1.

(page EN-201)

EQ1 Gain EQ1 Gain Adjusts the gain of Equalizer 1. –12 - 00 - 12

EQ2 Freq EQ2 Frequency Adjusts the center frequency of Equalizer 2.

(page EN-201)

EQ2 Gain EQ2 Gain Adjusts the gain of Equalizer 2. –12 - 00 - 12

EQ3 Freq EQ3 Frequency Adjusts the center frequency of Equalizer 3.

(page EN-201)

EQ3 Gain EQ3 Gain Adjusts the gain of Equalizer 3. –12 - 00 - 12

Input Level Input Level Adjusts the input level. 000 - 127

Wet Level Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 - 127

Dry Level Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 - 127

Effect

Description Settings

Display

Parameter

Name

Reference

EN-191



Tone Control Monaural tone control that adjusts low, mid, and high frequencies.

Low Freq Low Frequency Adjusts the cutoff frequency of Low-range

(page EN-201)

Low Gain Low Gain Adjusts the Low-range gain. –12 - 00 - 12

Mid Freq Mid Frequency Adjusts the center frequency of Mid-range.

(page EN-201)

Mid Gain Mid Gain Adjusts the Mid-range gain. –12 - 00 - 12

High Freq High Frequency Adjusts the cutoff frequency of High-range

(page EN-201)

High Gain High Gain Adjusts the High-range gain. –12 - 00 - 12

Input Level Input Level Adjusts the input level. 000 - 127

Wet Level Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 - 127

Dry Level Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 - 127



Tremolo Uses an LFO to shift the volume of the input signal.

Rate LFO Rate Adjusts the LFO rate. 000 - 127

Depth LFO Depth Adjusts the LFO depth. 000 - 127

Waveform LFO Waveform Selects the LFO waveform. Sine,

Triangle,

Trapzoid

Wet Level Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 - 127

Dry Level Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 - 127



Auto Pan Uses an LFO to shift the phase of the input signal.

Rate LFO Rate Adjusts the LFO rate. 000 - 127

Depth LFO Depth Adjusts the LFO depth. 000 - 127

Waveform LFO Waveform Selects the LFO waveform. Sine,

Triangle,

Trapzoid,

Trapzoid 1,

Trapzoid 2,

Trapzoid 3,

Trapzoid 4

Manual Manual Adjusts the pan (stereo position). –64 is full left,

0 is center, and +63 is full right.

–64 - 00 - 63

Wet Level Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 - 127

Dry Level Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 - 127

Effect

Description Settings

Display

Parameter

Name

Reference

EN-192



Compressor Compresses the input signal and suppresses level variation.

Attack Attack Adjusts the time until compression goes into

effect. A smaller value causes prompt

compressor operation, which suppresses the

attack of the input signal. A larger values delays

compressor operation, which causes the attack

of the input signal to be output as-is.

000 - 127

Release Release Adjusts the time until compression is released

after the input signal drops below a prescribed

level. When an attack feeling is desired (no

compression at the onset of the sound), set this

parameter to as low a value as possible. To

have compression applied at all times, set a

high value.

000 - 127

Ratio Ratio Adjusts the compression ratio of the audio

signal.

1:1, 2:1, 4:1,

8:1, 16:1, 32:1,

Inf:1

Wet Level Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. Output

volume changes in accordance with the Ratio

setting and the characteristics of the input tone.

000 - 127

Dry Level Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 - 127



Limiter Limits the input signal level so it does not rise above a preset

level.

Limit Limit Adjusts the volume level of the limit at which

limiting is applied.

000 - 127

Attack Attack Adjusts the time until the compression effect

starts. A smaller value causes prompt limiter

operation, which suppresses the attack of the

input signal. A larger values delays limiter

operation, which causes the attack of the input

signal to be output as-is.

000 - 127

Release Release Adjusts the time until compression is released

after the input signal drops below a prescribed

level.

000 - 127

Wet Level Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. Output

volume changes in accordance with the Limit

setting and the characteristics of the input tone.

Use this parameter to correct for such changes.

000 - 127

Dry Level Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 - 127

Effect

Description Settings

Display

Parameter

Name

Reference

EN-193



Enhancer Enhances the profiles of the low range and high range of the input

signal.

Low Freq Low Frequency Adjusts the low range enhancer frequency. 000 - 127

Low Gain Low Gain Adjusts the low range enhancer gain. 000 - 127

High Freq High Frequency Adjusts the high range enhancer frequency. 000 - 127

High Gain High Gain Adjusts the high range enhancer gain. 000 - 127

Input Level Input Level Adjusts the input level. 000 - 127

Wet Level Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 - 127

Dry Level Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 - 127



Phaser Produces a distinctive pulsating, broad sound by using an LFO to

change the phase of the input signal and then mixes it with the

original input signal.

Resonance Resonance Adjusts the strength of feedback. 000 - 127

Manual Manual Adjusts the reference phaser shift amount. –64 - 00 - 63

Rate LFO Rate Adjusts the LFO rate. 000 - 127

Depth LFO Depth Adjusts the LFO depth. 000 - 127

Waveform LFO Waveform Selects the LFO waveform. Sine,

Triangle,

Random

Input Level Input Level Adjusts the input level. 000 - 127

Wet Level Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 - 127

Dry Level Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 - 127



Chorus Gives notes depth and breadth.

Rate LFO Rate Adjusts the LFO rate. 000 - 127

Depth LFO Depth Adjusts the LFO depth. 000 - 127

Waveform LFO Waveform Selects the LFO waveform. Sine,

Triangle

Feedback Feedback Adjusts the strength of feedback –64 - 00 - 63

Wet Level Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 - 127

Polarity Polarity Inverts the LFO of one channel. Negative,

Positive

Input Level Input Level Adjusts the input level. 000 - 127

Dry Level Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 - 127

Effect

Description Settings

Display

Parameter

Name

Reference

EN-194



Flanger Applies wildly pulsating and metallic reverberation to notes.

Enables selection of the LFO waveform.

Rate LFO Rate Adjusts the LFO rate. 000 - 127

Depth LFO Depth Adjusts the LFO depth. 000 - 127

Waveform LFO Waveform Selects the LFO waveform. Sine,

Triangle,

Random

Feedback Feedback Adjusts the strength of feedback –64 - 00 - 63

Wet Level Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 - 127

Input Level Input Level Adjusts the input level. 000 - 127

Dry Level Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 - 127



Rotary This effect is a rotary speaker simulator.

Type Type Selects the rotary speaker type. 0 - 3

Speed Speed Switches the speed mode between fast and

slow.

Slow, Fast

Brake Brake Stops speaker rotation. Rotate, Stop

Fall Accel Fall Accel Adjusts acceleration when the speed mode is

switched from fast to slow.

000 - 127

Rise Accel Rise Accel Adjusts acceleration when the speed mode is

switched from slow to fast.

000 - 127

Slow Rate Slow Rate Adjusts the speaker rotation speed in the slow

speed mode.

000 - 127

Fast Rate Fast Rate Adjusts the speaker rotation speed in the fast

speed mode.

000 - 127

Vib/Cho Vibrato/Chorus Selects the vibrato and the chorus type. Off,

Vibrato1,

Chorus 1,

Vibrato2,

Chorus 2,

Vibrato3,

Chorus 3

Wet Level Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 - 127

Dry Level Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 - 127

Effect

Description Settings

Display

Parameter

Name

Reference

EN-195



Drive Rotary A rotary speaker simulator that makes overdrive possible.

Type Type Selects the rotary speaker type. 0 - 3

OD Gain Overdrive Gain Adjusts overdrive gain. 000 - 127

OD Level Overdrive Level Adjusts the overdrive output level. 000 - 127

Speed Speed Switches the speed mode between fast and

slow.

Slow, Fast

Brake Brake Stops speaker rotation. Rotate, Stop

Fall Accel Fall Accel Adjusts acceleration when the speed mode is

switched from fast to slow.

000 - 127

Rise Accel Rise Accel Adjusts acceleration when the speed mode is

switched from slow to fast.

000 - 127

Slow Rate Slow Rate Adjusts the speaker rotation speed in the slow

speed mode.

000 - 127

Fast Rate Fast Rate Adjusts the speaker rotation speed in the fast

speed mode.

000 - 127

Vib/Cho Vibrato/Chorus Selects the vibrato and the chorus type. Off,

Vibrato1,

Chorus 1,

Vibrato2,

Chorus 2,

Vibrato3,

Chorus 3

Wet Level Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 - 127

Dry Level Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 - 127



PitchShifter This effect transforms the pitch of the input signal.

PitchQuarter Pitch Adjusts the pitch shift amount in quarter tone

steps.

–24 - 00 - 24

High Damp High Damp Adjusts the high-range damp. A smaller number

increases damping.

000 - 127

Feedback Feedback Adjusts the feedback amount. 000 - 127

Input Level Input Level Adjusts the input level. 000 - 127

Wet Level Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 - 127

Dry Level Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 - 127

Pitch Fine Fine Adjusts the pitch shift amount. –50 is a quarter

note decrease, while +50 is a quarter note

increase.

–50 - 00 - 50

Effect

Description Settings

Display

Parameter

Name

Reference

EN-196



Ring Modulator Multiplies the input signal with an internal oscillator signal to

create a metallic sound.

OSC Freq OSC Frequency Sets the reference frequency of the internal

oscillator.

000 - 127

Rate LFO Rate Adjusts the LFO rate. 000 - 127

Depth LFO Depth Adjusts the LFO depth. 000 - 127

Tone Tone Adjusts the timbre of the ring modulator input

sound.

000 - 127

Wet Level Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 - 127

Dry Level Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 - 127



Reflection An effect that simulates the initial reflection of reverberation.

Applies acoustic ambiance and presence to notes.

Wet Level Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 - 127

Feedback Feedback Adjusts the repeat of the reflected sound. 000 - 127

Tone Tone Adjusts the tone of the reflected sound. 000 - 127

Input Level Input Level Adjusts the input level. 000 - 127

Dry Level Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 - 127



Delay Delays the input signal and feeds it back to create a repeating

effect.

Time Delay Time Adjusts the total delay time in 1 ms units. 0001 - 1099

L.Time Ratio Delay Ratio L Adjusts the ratio of the left channel relative to

the total delay time.

000 - 127

R.Time Ratio Delay Ratio R Adjusts the ratio of the right channel relative to

the total delay time.

000 - 127

L.Level Delay Level L Adjusts the level of the left channel. 000 - 127

R.Level Delay Level R Adjusts the level of the right channel. 000 - 127

FeedbackType

Feedback Type Selects the feedback type.

Stereo: Stereo feedback

Cross: Cross feedback

Stereo, Cross

Feedback Lvl

Feedback Adjusts the feedback amount. 000 - 127

High Damp High Damp Adjusts the high-range damp. A smaller number

increases damping.

000 - 127

Tmpo Sync Delay Tempo

Sync

Specifies how the actual total delay time is

synced with tempo.

Off: Uses Delay Time value.

1/4 to 1: Uses value in accordance with number

of beats.

Off, 1/4, 1/3,

3/8, 1/2, 2/3,

3/4, 1

Effect

Description Settings

Display

Parameter

Name

Reference

EN-197

Input Level Input Level Adjusts the input level. 000 - 127

Dry Level Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 - 127

Wet Level Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 - 127



Piano Effect An effect suited to acoustic piano play.

Lid Type Lid Type Adjusts how sound resonates in accordance

with the opening state of a piano lid.

Closed,

SemiOpen,

FullOpen

ReflectLevel Reflection Level Adjusts the level of the initial reflection. 000 - 127

Input Level Input Level Adjusts the input level. 000 - 127

Wet Level Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 - 127

Dry Level Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 - 127



LFO Wah “Wah” effect that can automatically affect the frequency using an

LFO.

Input Level Input Level Adjusts the input level. The input signal can

become distorted when the level of the sound

being input, the number of chords, or the

Resonance value is large. Adjust this parameter

to eliminate such distortion.

000 - 127

Resonance Resonance Adjusts the strength of feedback 000 - 127

Manual Manual Adjusts the wah filter reference frequency. 000 - 127

Rate LFO Rate Adjusts the LFO rate. 000 - 127

Depth LFO Depth Adjusts the LFO depth. 000 - 127

Waveform LFO Waveform Selects the LFO waveform. Sine,

Triangle,

Random

Wet Level Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 - 127

Dry Level Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 - 127

Effect

Description Settings

Display

Parameter

Name

Reference

EN-198



Auto Wah “Wah” effect that can automatically shift the frequency according

to the input signal level.

Input Level Input Level Adjusts the input level. The input signal can

become distorted when the level of the sound

being input, the number of chords, or the

Resonance value is large. Adjust this parameter

to eliminate such distortion.

000 - 127

Resonance Resonance Adjusts the strength of feedback 000 - 127

Manual Manual Adjusts the wah filter reference frequency. 000 - 127

Depth Depth Adjusts the depth of the wah in accordance with

the level of the input signal. Setting a positive

value causes the wah filter to open in direct

proportion with the size of the input signal,

producing a bright sound. Setting a negative

value causes the wah filter to close in direct

proportion with the size of the input signal,

producing a dark sound.

–64 - 00 - 63

Wet Level Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 - 127

Dry Level Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 - 127



Modeling Wah Simulates various types of wah pedals. An effect that can

automatically shift the frequency according to the level of the input

signal.

Output Level

Level Adjusts the wah level. 000 - 127

Type Type Selects the wah type. CAE, CRY,

IBZ, VO,

FAT, LIGHT,

7STR, RESO

Manual Manual Adjusts the wah filter reference frequency. 000 - 127

Depth Depth Adjusts the depth of the wah in accordance with

the level of the input signal. Setting a positive

value causes the wah filter to open in direct

proportion with the size of the input signal,

producing a bright sound. Setting a negative

value causes the wah filter to close in direct

proportion with the size of the input signal,

producing a dark sound.

–64 - 00 - 63

Wet Level Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 - 127

Dry Level Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 - 127

Effect

Description Settings

Display

Parameter

Name

Reference

EN-199



Distortion Distortion, wah, and amp simulator combined into a single effect.

Dist Gain Dist Gain Adjusts the distortion input signal gain. 000 - 127

Dist Level Dist Level Adjusts the distortion output level. 000 - 127

Dist Low Dist Low Adjusts the distortion low-range gain. 000 - 127

Dist High Dist High Adjusts the distortion high-range gain. 000 - 127

Wah Type Wah Type Specifies the wah type. LPF, C-Wah,

V-Wah,

F-Wah,

L-Wah,

H-Wah

Wah Depth Wah Depth Adjusts the depth of the wah in accordance with

the level of the input signal.

–64 - 00 - 63

Wah Manual

Wah Manual Adjusts the wah filter reference frequency. 000 - 127

Routing Routing Specifies the distortion and wah connection. Dist, Wah,

Wah-Dist,

Dist-Wah

Amp Type Amp Specifies the amp type. Bypass,

FD-PRNST,

FD-TWRV1,

RL-J12,

FD-TWD,

FD-DXRV,

VX-AC3,

ML-DC3,

MB-MK1,

MS-STK,

FD-TWRV2,

SL-SLO,

MB-RCTF,

PV-51-SK,

BASS-CMB,

FD-BMAN,

BASS-STK

Wet Level Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 - 127

Dry Level Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 - 127

Effect

Description Settings

Display

Parameter

Name

Reference

EN-200



Drive Simulates the drive of a musical instrument amplifier.

Type Drive Type Selects the drive type.

(page EN-201)

Gain Gain Adjusts the driver input signal gain. 000 - 127

Output Level

Level Adjusts the drive output level. 000 - 127

Wet Level Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 - 127

Dry Level Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 - 127



Amp Cab Simulates an amp without distortion-generating drive and speaker

cabinet.

Type Type Selects the amp cabinet type. (page EN-202)

Variation Variation Selects a variation that changes the setup of the

currently selected amp. The number of

variations (page EN-202) depends on the amp

type.

1 - 4

Wet Level Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 - 127

Dry Level Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 - 127



Vibraphone Tremolo An effect that simulates the tremolo effect of vibraphone.

Rate LFO Rate Adjusts the LFO rate. 000 - 127

Depth LFO Depth Adjusts the LFO depth. 000 - 127

Input Level Input Level Adjusts the input level. 000 - 127

Wet Level Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 - 127

Dry Level Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 - 127



Mono IR Simulates the acoustic characteristics by monaural IR (Impulse

Response) data.

Categ Category Selects the IR data category.

*5 *7

Type Type Selects the IR data type.

*6 *8

Wet Level Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 - 127

Dry Level Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 - 127

Effect

Description Settings

Display

Parameter

Name

Reference

EN-201

*1 100Hz, 125Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz, 250Hz, 315Hz, 400Hz, 500Hz, 630Hz, 800Hz, 1.0kHz, 1.3kHz,

1.6kHz, 2.0kHz, 2.5kHz, 3.2kHz, 4.0kHz, 5.0kHz, 6.3kHz, 8.0kHz

*2 50Hz, 63Hz, 80Hz, 100Hz, 125Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz, 250Hz, 315Hz, 400Hz, 500Hz, 630Hz, 800Hz

*3 2.0kHz, 2.5kHz, 3.2kHz, 4.0kHz, 5.0kHz, 6.0kHz, 8.0kHz, 10kHz, 13kHz, 16kHz

*5 Refer to the “Category” column of “IR Type List” (page EN-204).

*6 Refer to the “Type” column of “IR Type List” (page EN-204).

*7 26 categories in all.

*8 The number of types differs from categories (1 to 121 types).



Stereo IR Simulates the acoustic characteristics by stereo IR (Impulse

Response) data.

L.Categ Left Category Selects the IR data category of the left

channel.

L.Type Left Type Selects the IR data type of the left channel.

*6 *8

R.Categ Right Category Selects the IR data category of the right

channel.

R.Type Right Type Selects the IR data type of the right channel.

*6 *8

Wet Level Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 - 127

Dry Level Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 - 127

Drive Type Display Description

Clean1 - 4 Clean1 - 4 Simulates a clean sound with little distortion.

Crunch1 - 4 Crunch1 - 4 Simulates a crisp crunch sound with little distortion.

Overdrive1 - 4 Overdrv1 - 4 Simulates an overdrive sound with mellow distortion.

Distortion1 - 4 Distort1 - 4 Simulates a hard, straight distortion sound.

Metal1 - 4 Metal1 - 4

Simulates an extreme and weighty distortion sound that is suitable

for heavy metal music.

Effect

Description Settings

Display

Parameter

Name

Reference

EN-202

Amp Cab Type List

Display Number of variations

FD-PRNST 1

FD-TWRV1 1

RL-J12 1

FD-TWD 1

FD-DXRV 1

VX-AC3 1

ML-DC3 1

MB-MK1 1

MS-STK 1

FD-TWRV2 1

SL-SLO 1

MB-RCTF 1

PV-51-SK 1

BASS-CMB 1

FD-BMAN 1

BASS-STK 1

65-MQ 3

AD-MP+CA 3

BC-HC30 2

BN-SHV 3

BN-ECS 3

BN-UBR 3

CV-LG3 3

DR-MZ38 2

DZ-V4 2

DZ-HA 2

EG-TWK 4

EG-VEN 3

EN-G15 2

EN-INV 1

EN-BM 1

EN-53+DI 2

EV-51III 4

FD-CHMP 3

FD-TWN 3

FD-TWRV3 3

FU-OD 2

GB-LANC 2

HK-TM18 3

HK-SBL 3

KH-STDT 2

KR-RV 3

LY-IRST 4

MB-MK3 3

MB-F3+DI 3

MB-D5 1

MB-DRCT 4

MB-TX+.5 1

MB-TX+DI 4

MS-VS80 4

MS-J800 4

MS-J2401 2

MS-J2000 3

MS-J2+MB 2

MS-PLX 3

MS-J1+DI 2

MT-CFT 4

OR-O15 4

PN-P7 2

PR-SE3 3

PV-51II 4

PV-65MH 4

RA-NBK 3

RL-J20 2

RL-J120 2

RV-30 2

SA-PS1 4

SL-X8 2

SL-X9 2

SP-1624 3

Display Number of variations

Reference

EN-203

SP-1695 3

SU-BGR3 3

VH-SP6 2

VX-A15 3

VX-A15TB 2

VX-A30 3

VX-A30TB 3

YM-DG8 4

YM-F112 4

YM-F115 4

RD-PET-PRE 4

RD-PET-PRE-TRM 4

RD-MK1-PRE 4

RD-MK1-PRE-TRM 4

RD-MK2-PRE 4

RD-MK2-PRE-TRM 4

RD-DMY-PRE 4

RD-PRE-STWT 4

YM-CP-PRE 4

YM-CP-PRE-TRM 4

WR-200-PRE 4

CLV-TAB-PRE 4

CLV-CMB-PRE 4

LES-CMB-PRE 4

RL-VP-PRE 4

AC-360 2

AP-SV4DI 2

EB-C450 2

FD-BMNtw 2

FD-BMNsv 2

FD-BMNbk 2

FD-STBAS 2

GK-150 3

MK-T501 3

SW-PB20 3

SW-SM50 3

Display Number of variations

RL-CBKB 1

LY-3C-AC 1

AC-SIM 4

AP-EXT-VIN 4

STR-EXT 4

MG-MIN-VCF-NEG 4

MG-MIN-VCF-POS 4

MG-MIN-VCF-TOP 3

MG-MIN-VCF-OVL 4

MG-MIN-VCF-OVL-T 4

SSL-LCUT 4

SSL-LMCUT 4

HI-BST 4

PARA-BST 4

BASFIL-DEP 4

BASFIL-SHL 4

EH-SS-SPRK 4

Display Number of variations

Reference

EN-204

IR Type List

Category

Type

Guitar Amp 1 FD-PRNST

Guitar Amp 1 FD-TWNRV1

Guitar Amp 1 RL-J12

Guitar Amp 1 FD-TWD

Guitar Amp 1 FD-DXRV

Guitar Amp 1 VX-AC3

Guitar Amp 1 ML-DC3

Guitar Amp 1 MB-MK1

Guitar Amp 1 MS-J8

Guitar Amp 1 FD-TWNRV2

Guitar Amp 1 SL-SLO

Guitar Amp 1 MB-RCTF

Guitar Amp 1 PV-51-SK

Guitar Amp 1 65-MQ cl

Guitar Amp 1 65-MQ cr

Guitar Amp 1 65-MQ od

Guitar Amp 1 AD-MP+CAB cl

Guitar Amp 1 AD-MP+CAB ds

Guitar Amp 1 AD-MP+CAB mt

Guitar Amp 1 BC-HC30 cr

Guitar Amp 1 BC-HC30 od

Guitar Amp 1 BN-SHV cl

Guitar Amp 1 BN-SHV od

Guitar Amp 1 BN-SHV ds

Guitar Amp 1 BN-ECS od

Guitar Amp 1 BN-ECS ds

Guitar Amp 1 BN-ECS mt

Guitar Amp 1 BN-UBR cl

Guitar Amp 1 BN-UBR od

Guitar Amp 1 BN-UBR mt

Guitar Amp 1 CV-LG3 cr

Guitar Amp 1 CV-LG3 ds1

Guitar Amp 1 CV-LG3 ds2

Guitar Amp 1 DR-MZ38 cl

Guitar Amp 1 DR-MZ38 cr

Guitar Amp 1 DZ-V4 cr

Guitar Amp 1 DZ-V4 mt

Guitar Amp 1 DZ-HA ds1

Guitar Amp 1 DZ-HA ds2

Guitar Amp 1 EG-TWK cl

Guitar Amp 1 EG-TWK cr

Guitar Amp 1 EG-TWK od

Guitar Amp 1 EG-TWK ds

Guitar Amp 1 EG-VEN cl

Guitar Amp 1 EG-VEN cr

Guitar Amp 1 EG-VEN ds

Guitar Amp 1 EN-G15 cl

Guitar Amp 1 EN-G15 ds

Guitar Amp 1 EN-INV

Guitar Amp 1 EN-BM

Guitar Amp 1 EV-51III cl

Guitar Amp 1 EV-51III od

Guitar Amp 1 EV-51III ds

Guitar Amp 1 EV-51III mt

Guitar Amp 1 FD-CHMP cl

Guitar Amp 1 FD-CHMP cr

Guitar Amp 1 FD-CHMP od

Guitar Amp 1 FD-TWN cl

Guitar Amp 1 FD-TWN cr

Guitar Amp 1 FD-TWN od

Guitar Amp 1 FD-TWRV3 cl

Guitar Amp 1 FD-TWRV3 cr

Guitar Amp 1 FD-TWRV3 od

Guitar Amp 1 FU-OD cr

Guitar Amp 1 FU-OD od

Guitar Amp 1 GB-LANC cl

Guitar Amp 1 GB-LANC od

Guitar Amp 1 HK-TM18 cl

Guitar Amp 1 HK-TM18 cr

Guitar Amp 1 HK-TM18 od

Guitar Amp 1 HK-SBL ds1

Guitar Amp 1 HK-SBL ds2

Category

Type

Reference

EN-205

Guitar Amp 1 HK-SBL ds3

Guitar Amp 1 KH-STDT cl

Guitar Amp 1 KH-STDT od

Guitar Amp 1 KR-RV ds

Guitar Amp 1 KR-RV mt1

Guitar Amp 1 KR-RV mt2

Guitar Amp 1 LY-IRST cl

Guitar Amp 1 LY-IRST cr

Guitar Amp 1 LY-IRST ds

Guitar Amp 1 LY-IRST mt

Guitar Amp 1 MB-MK3 cl

Guitar Amp 1 MB-MK3 od

Guitar Amp 1 MB-MK3 ds

Guitar Amp 1 MB-D5 ds

Guitar Amp 1 MB-DRCT ds

Guitar Amp 1 MB-DRCT mt1

Guitar Amp 1 MB-DRCT mt2

Guitar Amp 1 MB-DRCT mt3

Guitar Amp 1 MB-TX+.5 ds

Guitar Amp 1 MS-VS80 cl

Guitar Amp 1 MS-VS80 cr

Guitar Amp 1 MS-VS80 od

Guitar Amp 1 MS-VS80 ds

Guitar Amp 1 MS-J800 cl

Guitar Amp 1 MS-J800 cr

Guitar Amp 1 MS-J800 ds

Guitar Amp 1 MS-J800 f10

Guitar Amp 1 MS-J2401 od

Guitar Amp 1 MS-J2401 ds

Guitar Amp 1 MS-J2000 cl

Guitar Amp 1 MS-J2000 cr

Guitar Amp 1 MS-J2000 ds

Guitar Amp 1 MS-J2+MB ds

Guitar Amp 1 MS-J2+MB mt

Guitar Amp 1 MS-PLX cr

Guitar Amp 1 MS-PLX od

Guitar Amp 1 MS-PLX ds

Guitar Amp 1 MT-CFT cl1

Category

Type

Guitar Amp 1 MT-CFT cl2

Guitar Amp 1 MT-CFT cr

Guitar Amp 1 MT-CFT od

Guitar Amp 1 OR-O15 cl

Guitar Amp 1 OR-O15 cr

Guitar Amp 1 OR-O15 od

Guitar Amp 1 OR-O15 ds

Guitar Amp 1 PN-P7 cl

Guitar Amp 1 PN-P7 ds

Guitar Amp 1 PR-SE3 cl

Guitar Amp 1 PR-SE3 cr

Guitar Amp 1 PR-SE3 ds

Guitar Amp 2 PV-51II ds1

Guitar Amp 2 PV-51II ds2

Guitar Amp 2 PV-51II ds3

Guitar Amp 2 PV-51II ds4

Guitar Amp 2 PV-65MH cr

Guitar Amp 2 PV-65MH od

Guitar Amp 2 PV-65MH ds1

Guitar Amp 2 PV-65MH ds2

Guitar Amp 2 RA-NBK cl

Guitar Amp 2 RA-NBK cr

Guitar Amp 2 RA-NBK ds

Guitar Amp 2 RL-J20 cl

Guitar Amp 2 RL-J20 ds

Guitar Amp 2 RL-J120 cl

Guitar Amp 2 RL-J120 ds

Guitar Amp 2 RV-30 cl

Guitar Amp 2 RV-30 cr

Guitar Amp 2 SA-PS1 cl

Guitar Amp 2 SA-PS1 od

Guitar Amp 2 SA-PS1 ds

Guitar Amp 2 SA-PS1 mt

Guitar Amp 2 SL-X8 cl

Guitar Amp 2 SL-X8 cr

Guitar Amp 2 SL-X9 ds1

Guitar Amp 2 SL-X9 ds2

Guitar Amp 2 SP-1624 cl

Category

Type

Reference

EN-206

Guitar Amp 2 SP-1624 cr

Guitar Amp 2 SP-1624 od

Guitar Amp 2 SP-1695 cl

Guitar Amp 2 SP-1695 cr

Guitar Amp 2 SP-1695 od

Guitar Amp 2 SU-BGR3 cl

Guitar Amp 2 SU-BGR3 od

Guitar Amp 2 SU-BGR3 ds

Guitar Amp 2 VH-SP6 cl

Guitar Amp 2 VH-SP6 od

Guitar Amp 2 VX-A15 cl

Guitar Amp 2 VX-A15 cr

Guitar Amp 2 VX-A15 od

Guitar Amp 2 VX-A15TB cl

Guitar Amp 2 VX-A15TB cr

Guitar Amp 2 VX-A30 cl

Guitar Amp 2 VX-A30 cr

Guitar Amp 2 VX-A30 od

Guitar Amp 2 VX-A30TB cl

Guitar Amp 2 VX-A30TB cr

Guitar Amp 2 VX-A30TB od

Guitar Amp 2 YM-DG8 cl

Guitar Amp 2 YM-DG8 cr

Guitar Amp 2 YM-DG8 od

Guitar Amp 2 YM-DG8 ds

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F112 cl

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F112 cl 87

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F112 cr

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F112 crD12

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F112 od

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F112 od 87

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F112a3

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F112a5

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F112a5 br

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F112a5 t-

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F112a5 b-

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F112a5 tb-

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F112a5 rv

Category

Type

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F112a5 fu

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F112a7

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F112aX

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F112aX fu

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F112A3

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F112A5

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F112A5 br

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F112A5 t-

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F112A5 b-

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F112A5 tb-

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F112A5 fu

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F112A5fubr

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F112A7

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F112AX

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F112AXfubr

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F112b35

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F112b3X

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F112b55

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F112b5X

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F112b5X br

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F112b5X t-

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F112b5X b-

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F112b5Xtb-

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F112b5X rv

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F112b5X fu

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F112b75

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F112b7X

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F112bX3tb-

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F112bX5

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F112bXX

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F112bXX fu

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F112bXXfub

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F112B3X

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F112B5X

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F112B5X br

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F112B5X t-

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F112B5X b-

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F112B5Xtb-

Category

Type

Reference

EN-207

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F112B5X rv

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F112B7X

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F112BXX

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F112BXXfub

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F115 cl

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F115 clD12

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F115 cr

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F115 cr 87

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F115 od

Guitar Amp 2 YM-F115 odD12

Guitar Amp 3 FRMS-M06dps L

Guitar Amp 3 FRMS-M06dpa R

Guitar Amp 3 MRS-HG06dpa L

Guitar Amp 3 MRS-HG06dpa R

Guitar Amp 3 MS-59SLdpa01L

Guitar Amp 3 MS-59SLdpa01R

Guitar Amp 3 MS-59SLdpa06L

Guitar Amp 3 MS-59SLdpa06R

Guitar Amp 3 MS-59SLdpa15L

Guitar Amp 3 MS-59SLdpa15R

Guitar Amp 3 MAES-60m02rvL

Guitar Amp 3 MAES-60m02rvR

Guitar Amp 3 PEG-60t5m1rvL

Guitar Amp 3 PEG-60t5m1rvR

Guitar Amp 3 FD-PRNC2ful1L

Guitar Amp 3 FD-PRNC2ful1R

Guitar Amp 3 FD-PRNC2ful2L

Guitar Amp 3 FD-PRNC2ful2R

Guitar Amp 3 FD-TRV4c15d6L

Guitar Amp 3 FD-TRV4c15d6R

Guitar Amp 3 GIB-GA06_M1 L

Guitar Amp 3 GIB-GA06_M1 R

Guitar Amp 3 GIB-GA06_M2 L

Guitar Amp 3 GIB-GA06_M2 R

Guitar Amp 3 GIB-GA20_M1 L

Guitar Amp 3 GIB-GA20_M1 R

Guitar Amp 3 GIB-GA20_M2 L

Guitar Amp 3 GIB-GA20_M2 R

Category

Type

Guitar Amp 3 RL-J12-5-L

Guitar Amp 3 RL-J12-5-R

Guitar Amp 3 RL-J12-FlF-L

Guitar Amp 3 RL-J12-FlF-R

Guitar Amp 3 RL-J12-Lo5-L

Guitar Amp 3 RL-J12-Lo5-R

Guitar Amp 3 RL-J12-LCB5-L

Guitar Amp 3 RL-J12-LCB5-R

Guitar Amp 3 RL-J12-Br5-L

Guitar Amp 3 RL-J12-Br5-R

Guitar Amp 3 RL-J12-BrF-L

Guitar Amp 3 RL-J12-BrF-R

Guitar Amp 3 RL-J12-Co5-L

Guitar Amp 3 RL-J12-Co5-R

Guitar Preamp EN-53+DI cl

Guitar Preamp EN-53+DI mt

Guitar Preamp MB-F3+DI cl

Guitar Preamp MB-F3+DI cr

Guitar Preamp MB-F3+DI ds

Guitar Preamp MB-TX+DI cl

Guitar Preamp MB-TX+DI cr

Guitar Preamp MB-TX+DI od

Guitar Preamp MB-TX+DI ds

Guitar Preamp MS-J1+DI cr

Guitar Preamp MS-J1+DI ds

Guitar Preamp YM-F112PRE

Guitar Preamp YM-F115PRE

Guitar Preamp RL-J12PrT-251

Guitar Preamp RL-J12PrT-252

Guitar Preamp RL-J12PrT-253

Guitar Preamp RL-J12PrT-2F

Guitar Preamp RL-J12PrTB2F

Guitar Preamp RL-J12PrT-25c

Guitar Preamp RL-J12PrT-25v

Guitar Preamp RL-J12PrT-2Fc

Guitar Preamp RL-J12PrT-2Fv

Guitar Preamp RL-J12Pr1-25

Guitar Preamp RL-J12Pr1-2F

Category

Type

Reference

EN-208

Guitar Preamp RL-J12Pr1B25

Guitar Preamp RL-J12Pr1B2F

Guitar Preamp RL-J12Pr2B35d

Guitar Preamp RL-J12Pr2-25r

Guitar Preamp RL-J12Pr2B25c

Guitar Preamp RL-J12Pr2B25v

Guitar Preamp RL-J12Sp-5-L

Guitar Preamp RL-J12Sp-5-R

Guitar Preamp RL-J12Sp-F-L

Guitar Preamp RL-J12Sp-F-R

Guitar Preamp RL-J12Sp-Co5L

Guitar Preamp RL-J12Sp-Co5R

Guitar Preamp RL-J12Sp-CB5L

Guitar Preamp RL-J12Sp-CB5R

Guitar Preamp RL-J12Sp-CoFL

Guitar Preamp RL-J12Sp-CoFR

Acou Amp LY-3C-AC

Bass Amp BASS-CMB

Bass Amp FD-BMAN

Bass Amp BASS-STK

Bass Amp AC-360 cl1

Bass Amp AC-360 cl2

Bass Amp EB-C450 cl

Bass Amp EB-C450 cr

Bass Amp FD-BMNtw cr

Bass Amp FD-BMNtw od

Bass Amp FD-BMNsv cl1

Bass Amp FD-BMNsv cl2

Bass Amp FD-BMNbk cl1

Bass Amp FD-BMNbk cl2

Bass Amp FD-STBAS cl1

Bass Amp FD-STBAS cl2

Bass Amp GK-150 cl1

Bass Amp GK-150 cl2

Bass Amp GK-150DI

Bass Amp MK-T501 cl1

Bass Amp MK-T501 cl2

Bass Amp MK-T501 cl3

Category

Type

Bass Amp SW-PB20 cl1

Bass Amp SW-PB20 cl2

Bass Amp SW-PB20 cl3

Bass Amp SW-SM50 cl1

Bass Amp SW-SM50 cl2

Bass Amp SW-SM50 cl3

Bass Preamp AP-SV4DI cl1

Bass Preamp AP-SV4DI cl2

EP Preamp 1 RD-PRE-FF00

EP Preamp 1 RD-PsvCenter

EP Preamp 1 RD-FD-RrSp0L

EP Preamp 1 RD-FD-RrSp0R

EP Preamp 1 RD-FD-RrSp3L

EP Preamp 1 RD-FD-RrSp3R

EP Preamp 1 RD-FD-Sp0L

EP Preamp 1 RD-FD-Sp0R

EP Preamp 1 RD-FD-Sp4L

EP Preamp 1 RD-FD-Sp4R

EP Preamp 1 RD-SvPRE-05-L

EP Preamp 1 RD-SvPRE-05-R

EP Preamp 1 RD-SvPRE-0F-L

EP Preamp 1 RD-SvPRE-0F-R

EP Preamp 1 RD-SvPRE-5F-L

EP Preamp 1 RD-SvPRE-5F-R

EP Preamp 1 RD-SvPRE-FF-L

EP Preamp 1 RD-SvPRE-FF-R

EP Preamp 1 RD-PETPRE cnt

EP Preamp 1 RD-PETPRE tbF

EP Preamp 1 RD-PETPRE lo-

EP Preamp 1 RD-PETPRElo-2

EP Preamp 1 RD-PETPRE nrm

EP Preamp 1 RD-PETPREl-t+

EP Preamp 1 RD-PETPRE t+2

EP Preamp 1 RD-PETPRl-t+2

EP Preamp 1 RD-PETPREtrm1

EP Preamp 1 RD-PETPREtrm2

EP Preamp 1 RD-PETPREtrm3

EP Preamp 1 RD-PETPREtrmf

Category

Type

Reference

EN-209

EP Preamp 1 RD-PETPRE-1FL

EP Preamp 1 RD-PETPRE-1FR

EP Preamp 1 RD-PETPRE-55L

EP Preamp 1 RD-PETPRE-55R

EP Preamp 1 RD-PETPRE-5FL

EP Preamp 1 RD-PETPRE-5FR

EP Preamp 1 RD-PETPRE-FFL

EP Preamp 1 RD-PETPRE-FFR

EP Preamp 1 RD-MK1PRE flt

EP Preamp 1 RD-MK1PRE nrm

EP Preamp 1 RD-MK1PREt+b-

EP Preamp 1 RD-MK1PRE tbF

EP Preamp 1 RD-MK1PRE tb2

EP Preamp 1 RD-MK1PRE tb3

EP Preamp 1 RD-MK1PRE tb5

EP Preamp 1 RD-MK1PRt5b-5

EP Preamp 1 RD-MK1PREtb-3

EP Preamp 1 RD-MK1PREtb-5

EP Preamp 1 RD-MK1PRE vb

EP Preamp 1 RD-MK1PRE fvb

EP Preamp 1 RD-MK1PREsetB

EP Preamp 1 RD-MK1PRE-05L

EP Preamp 1 RD-MK1PRE-05R

EP Preamp 1 RD-MK1PRE-0FL

EP Preamp 1 RD-MK1PRE-0FR

EP Preamp 1 RD-MK1PRE-55L

EP Preamp 1 RD-MK1PRE-55R

EP Preamp 1 RD-MK1PRE-5FL

EP Preamp 1 RD-MK1PRE-5FR

EP Preamp 1 RD-MK2PRE cnt

EP Preamp 1 RD-MK2PRE lo-

EP Preamp 1 RD-MK2PRE hi+

EP Preamp 1 RD-MK2PRE nrm

EP Preamp 1 RD-MK2PRE 0vb

EP Preamp 1 RD-MK2PRE Fvb

EP Preamp 1 RD-MK2PRE hi-

EP Preamp 1 RD-MK2PRE hl-

EP Preamp 1 RD-MK2PRE lo+

Category

Type

EP Preamp 1 RD-MK2PRE-5F

EP Preamp 1 RD-MK2PRE-FF

EP Preamp 1 RD-MK2PREMinF

EP Preamp 1 RD-MK2PRE-0FL

EP Preamp 1 RD-MK2PRE-0FR

EP Preamp 1 RD-MK2PRE-55L

EP Preamp 1 RD-MK2PRE-55R

EP Preamp 1 RD-MK2PRE-5FL

EP Preamp 1 RD-MK2PRE-5FR

EP Preamp 1 RD-MK2PRE-FFL

EP Preamp 1 RD-MK2PRE-FFR

EP Preamp 1 RD-DMYPRE bs+

EP Preamp 1 RD-DMYPREbsmd

EP Preamp 1 RD-DMYPRE ot+

EP Preamp 1 RD-DMYPREovtm

EP Preamp 1 RD-DMYPREovtF

EP Preamp 1 RD-DMYPRE nrm

EP Preamp 1 RD-DMYPREaltB

EP Preamp 1 RD-DMYP-Tpn3L

EP Preamp 1 RD-DMYP-Tpn3R

EP Preamp 1 RD-STWPRE nrm

EP Preamp 1 RD-STWPRE min

EP Preamp 1 RD-STWPRE hi+

EP Preamp 1 RD-STWPRE hiF

EP Preamp 1 RD-STWPREh+l+

EP Preamp 1 RD-STWPREhFl-

EP Preamp 2 WR-200PRE po

EP Preamp 2 WR-200PRE po2

EP Preamp 2 WR-200PRE spo

EP Preamp 2 WR-200PREspo2

EP Preamp 2 WR-200PREtrm1

EP Preamp 2 WR-200PREtrm2

EP Preamp 2 WR-200PREtrpo

EP Preamp 2 WR-200PRtrspo

EP Preamp 2 WR-200PRE-3dB

EP Preamp 2 WR-200PRE-Ful

EP Preamp 2 VV-RdMonFF00

EP Preamp 2 YM-CPPRE nrm

Category

Type

Reference

EN-210

EP Preamp 2 YM-CPPRE flt

EP Preamp 2 YM-CPPRE lo-

EP Preamp 2 YM-CPPRE bs-

EP Preamp 2 YM-CPPRE mid-

EP Preamp 2 YM-CPPRE tb-

EP Preamp 2 YM-CPPREbass+

EP Preamp 2 YM-CPPRE full

EP Preamp 2 YM-CPPREtrm

EP Preamp 2 YM-CPPREtrml-

EP Preamp 2 YM-CPPREtrmm+

EP Preamp 2 YM-CPPREtrmt+

EP Preamp 2 YM-CPPRE-00FL

EP Preamp 2 YM-CPPRE-00FR

EP Preamp 2 YM-CPPRE-05FL

EP Preamp 2 YM-CPPRE-05FR

EP Preamp 2 YM-CPPRE-22FL

EP Preamp 2 YM-CPPRE-22FR

EP Preamp 2 CLV-TABPREful

EP Preamp 2 CLV-TABPREbri

EP Preamp 2 CLV-TABPREtrb

EP Preamp 2 CLV-TABPREsft

EP Preamp 2 CLV-CMBPREnbr

EP Preamp 2 CLV-CMBPREntb

EP Preamp 2 CLV-CMBPREnmd

EP Preamp 2 CLV-CMBPREnsf

EP Preamp 2 CLV-CMBPREmed

EP Preamp 2 CLV-CMBPREsft

EP Preamp 2 CLV-CMBPRmsft

EP Preamp 2 CLV-CMBPRtsft

EP Preamp 2 CLV-CMBPbtsft

Organ Amp LES-Mc1mHnOfL

Organ Amp LES-Mc1mHnOfR

Organ Amp LES-Mc1mHnOnL

Organ Amp LES-Mc1mHnOnR

Organ Amp LES-McHiHnOfL

Organ Amp LES-McHiHnOfR

Organ Amp LES-McHiHnOnL

Organ Amp LES-McHiHnOnR

Category

Type

Organ Amp LES-McLoHnOfL

Organ Amp LES-McLoHnOfR

Organ Amp LES-McLoHnOnL

Organ Amp LES-McLoHnOnR

Organ Amp LES-McMxHnOfL

Organ Amp LES-McMxHnOfR

Organ Amp LES-McMxHnOnL

Organ Amp LES-McMxHnOnR

Inst Amp RL-CBKB

Audio Device SPK-7VINT L

Audio Device SPK-7VINT R

Audio Device SPK-DTOP-2B L

Audio Device SPK-DTOP-2B R

Audio Device SPK-DSCPOOL L

Audio Device SPK-DSCPOOL R

Audio Device SPK-SILmicroL

Audio Device SPK-SILmicroR

Audio Device TOYSP-RNGO L

Audio Device TOYSP-RNGO R

Audio Device TOYSP-SYUBO L

Audio Device TOYSP-SYUBO R

Audio Device MEGAPH-FET L

Audio Device MEGAPH-FET R

Audio Device TV-37 L

Audio Device TV-37 R

Audio Device TV-SAMS-50 L

Audio Device TV-SAMS-50 R

Audio Device RADIO-SallBkL

Audio Device RADIO-SallBkR

Audio Device RADIO-NICO L

Audio Device RADIO-NICO R

Audio Device RADIO-NOVK L

Audio Device RADIO-NOVK R

Audio Device RADIO-TELF L

Audio Device RADIO-TELF R

Audio Device RADIO-TSTR L

Audio Device RADIO-TSTR R

Audio Device RADIO-ZENT L

Category

Type

Reference

EN-211

Audio Device RADIO-ZENT R

Audio Device RECPL-DANS L

Audio Device RECPL-DANS R

Audio Device RECPL-EDN L

Audio Device RECPL-EDN R

Audio Device RECPL-JOPH L

Audio Device RECPL-JOPH R

Audio Device RECPL-REDH L

Audio Device RECPL-REDH R

Audio Device RECPL-REEL L

Audio Device RECPL-REEL R

Audio Device PC-McMini L

Audio Device PC-McMini R

Audio Device PC-LAPTOP15 L

Audio Device PC-LAPTOP15 R

Audio Device TABLT-iPD3 L

Audio Device TABLT-iPD3 R

Audio Device TABLT-9G L

Audio Device TABLT-9G R

Audio Device PHONE-iPh5 L

Audio Device PHONE-iPh5 R

Audio Device PHONE-AK L

Audio Device PHONE-AK R

Audio Device EARP-WH L

Audio Device EARP-WH R

Audio Device HDPH-AV35BL L

Audio Device HDPH-AV35BL R

Audio Device CAR-OPL L

Audio Device CAR-OPL R

Audio Device CAR-SednPassL

Audio Device CAR-SednPassR

Audio Device GNL-Mic-0-L

Audio Device GNL-Mic-0-R

Audio Device GNL-Mic-3-L

Audio Device GNL-Mic-3-R

Audio Device GNL-Mic-6-L

Audio Device GNL-Mic-6-R

Other Preamp LES-CMBPREnrm

Category

Type

Other Preamp LES-CMBPREdrv

Other Preamp LES-CMBPREbas

Other Preamp LES-CMBPREclp

Other Preamp LES-CMBPRE od

Other Preamp LES-CMBPREodF

Other Preamp RL-VPPRE drv

Other Preamp RL-VPPRE ful

Other Preamp RL-VPPRE nrm

Other Preamp RL-VPPRE toff

Other Preamp CountryM-DI

Other Preamp RadiJDV-DI

Other Preamp RadiPro48-DI

Other Preamp RadiPro48-Pad

Other Preamp RetroTube

Other Preamp RetroTubeWt

Other Preamp RetroTubeWtOd

Other Preamp TTNX-LA2-00dB

Other Preamp TTNX-LA2-03dB

Other Preamp NEV-1272-3dbL

Other Preamp NEV-1272-3dbR

Other Preamp NEV-1272-6dbL

Other Preamp NEV-1272-6dbR

Synth Module MG-M-VCF co00

Synth Module MG-M-VCF co01

Synth Module MG-M-VCF co02

Synth Module MG-M-VCF co03

Synth Module MG-M-VCF co04

Synth Module MG-M-VCF co05

Synth Module MG-M-VCF co06

Synth Module MG-M-VCF co07

Synth Module MG-M-VCF co08

Synth Module MG-M-VCF co09

Synth Module MG-M-VCF co10

Synth Module MG-M-VCFco0ol

Synth Module MG-M-VCFco1ol

Synth Module MG-M-VCFco2ol

Synth Module MG-M-VCFco3ol

Synth Module MG-M-VCFco4ol

Category

Type

Reference

EN-212

Synth Module MG-M-VCFco5ol

Synth Module MG-M-VCFco6ol

Synth Module MG-M-VCFco7ol

Synth Module MG-M-VCFco8ol

Synth Module MG-M-VCFco9ol

Synth Module MG-M-VCFc10ol

Synth Module MG-M-VCFc00nk

Synth Module MG-M-VCFc01nk

Synth Module MG-M-VCFc02nk

Synth Module MG-M-VCFc03nk

Synth Module MG-M-VCFc04nk

Synth Module MG-M-VCFc05nk

Synth Module MG-M-VCFc06nk

Synth Module MG-M-VCFc07nk

Synth Module MG-M-VCFc08nk

Synth Module MG-M-VCFc09nk

Synth Module MG-M-VCFc10nk

Synth Module MG-Pha06P-Lo1

Synth Module MG-Pha06P-Hi1

Synth Module MG-Pha12P-Lo1

Synth Module MG-Pha12P-Hi1

Effect 1 AC-SIM-CUB

Effect 1 AC-SIM-CDH

Effect 1 AC-SIM-ZOM1

Effect 1 AC-SIM-ZOM2

Effect 1 APX-EXT-RED

Effect 1 APX-EXT-RED05

Effect 1 APX-EXT-RED07

Effect 1 APX-EXT-RED09

Effect 1 APX-EXT-VIN

Effect 1 APX-EXT-VIN05

Effect 1 APX-EXT-VIN07

Effect 1 APX-EXT-VIN09

Effect 1 APX-A602B-50L

Effect 1 APX-A602B-50R

Effect 1 APX-A602B-90L

Effect 1 APX-A602B-90R

Effect 1 APX-ST2-FlHiL

Category

Type

Effect 1 APX-ST2-FlHiR

Effect 1 APX-ST2-MoHiL

Effect 1 APX-ST2-MoHiR

Effect 1 STR-EXT gin-

Effect 1 STR-EXT gin+

Effect 1 STR-EXT nsgn-

Effect 1 STR-EXTAnsgn-

Effect 1 NSF-EXT gin+

Effect 1 NSF-EXTA gin+

Effect 1 SS-RED cl-off

Effect 1 SS-RED cloff1

Effect 1 SS-RED cloff2

Effect 1 SS-RED cloffS

Effect 1 SS-RED cloffF

Effect 1 SS-RED cl-on

Effect 1 SS-RED cl-on1

Effect 1 SS-RED cl-on2

Effect 1 SS-RED clonSl

Effect 1 SS-RED clonFs

Effect 1 SS-OLD cl-off

Effect 1 SS-OLD cloff1

Effect 1 SS-OLD cloff2

Effect 1 SS-OLD cloffS

Effect 1 SS-OLD cloffF

Effect 1 SS-OLD cl-on

Effect 1 SS-OLD cl-on1

Effect 1 SS-OLD cl-on2

Effect 1 SS-OLD cl-onS

Effect 1 SS-OLD cl-onF

Effect 1 EPX-PRE-DI1

Effect 1 EPX-PRE-DI2

Effect 1 EPX-PRE-Dry1

Effect 1 EPX-PRE-Dry2

Effect 1 EPX-PRELgDI1

Effect 1 EPX-PREShDly1

Effect 1 EPX-PRELgDly1

Effect 1 MAE-Pha-1

Effect 1 MAE-Pha-2

Category

Type

Reference

EN-213

Effect 1 MAE-Pha-Sl

Effect 1 MAE-Pha-Fs

Effect 1 MXO-Pha-1

Effect 1 MX-Cho120012L

Effect 1 MX-Cho120012R

Effect 1 MX-Cho121200L

Effect 1 MX-Cho121200R

Effect 1 MX-Cho121212L

Effect 1 MX-Cho121212R

Effect 1 MX-Cho12FF12L

Effect 1 MX-Cho12FF12R

Effect 1 MX-Pha90-Blk1

Effect 1 MX-Pha90-BlkS

Effect 1 MX-Pha90-Led1

Effect 1 MX-Pha90-LedS

Effect 1 MX-Pha90-Old1

Effect 1 MX-Pha90-OldS

Effect 1 MX-Pha-Blkm 1

Effect 1 MX-Pha-Scrp 1

Effect 1 OBH-Pha 1

Effect 1 OBH-Pha Sl

Effect 1 OBH-Pha Fs1

Effect 2 UVB-PhaCho 1

Effect 2 UVB-PhaChoSl

Effect 2 UVB-PhaChoMo1

Effect 2 UVB-PhaChoMoS

Effect 2 UVB-PhaVib

Effect 2 UVB-PhaVibSl

Effect 2 UVB-PhaVibMoS

Effect 2 SEI-Fuz Soft

Effect 2 SEI-Fuz Hard

Effect 2 SEI-SFuzTonDl

Effect 2 SEI-SFuzTonUp

Effect 2 VX-FuzDown 1

Effect 2 VX-FuzUp 1

Effect 2 BOS-CE1-F5-L

Effect 2 BOS-CE1-F5-R

Effect 2 BOS-CE1-FMaxL

Category

Type

Effect 2 BOS-CE1-FMaxR

Effect 2 BOS-CE1-OvldL

Effect 2 BOS-CE1-OvldR

Effect 2 RL-DIMEN-SW1L

Effect 2 RL-DIMEN-SW1R

Effect 2 RL-DIMEN-SW2L

Effect 2 RL-DIMEN-SW2R

Effect 2 RL-DIMEN-SW3L

Effect 2 RL-DIMEN-SW3R

Effect 2 RL-DIMEN-SW4L

Effect 2 RL-DIMEN-SW4R

Effect 2 TCE-1210St1-L

Effect 2 TCE-1210St1-R

Effect 2 TCE-1210St2-L

Effect 2 TCE-1210St2-R

Effect 3 DEK-Cas-Dk10L

Effect 3 DEK-Cas-Dk10R

Effect 3 DEK-Cas-MdFlL

Effect 3 DEK-Cas-MdFlR

Effect 3 DEK-Cas-BrFlL

Effect 3 DEK-Cas-BrFlR

Effect 3 DEK-Stu-Dk10L

Effect 3 DEK-Stu-Dk10R

Effect 3 DEK-Stu-MdFlL

Effect 3 DEK-Stu-MdFlR

Effect 3 DEK-Stu-BrFlL

Effect 3 DEK-Stu-BrFlR

Effect 3 STEC-AN2-55-L

Effect 3 STEC-AN2-55-R

Effect 3 STEC-AN2-FF-L

Effect 3 STEC-AN2-FF-R

Equalizer 1 Flat

Equalizer 1 SSL lcut00

Equalizer 1 SSL lcut10

Equalizer 1 SSL lcut20

Equalizer 1 SSL lcut40

Equalizer 1 SSL lcut70

Equalizer 1 SSL lcut120

Category

Type

Reference

EN-214

Equalizer 1 SSL lmcut160

Equalizer 1 SSL lmcut200

Equalizer 1 SSL lmcut300

Equalizer 1 SSL lmcut400

Equalizer 1 SSL air med

Equalizer 1 SSL air ful

Equalizer 1 TRB-BSTslight

Equalizer 1 TRB-BST half

Equalizer 1 TRB-BST med

Equalizer 1 TRB-BST full

Equalizer 1 PARA-BST h

Equalizer 1 PARA-BST h+

Equalizer 1 PARA-BST h+m+

Equalizer 1 PARA-BST h++

Equalizer 1 PARA-BST hm

Equalizer 1 PARA-BSThm ms

Equalizer 1 BASFIL flat

Equalizer 1 BASFIL shl00

Equalizer 1 BASFIL shl10

Equalizer 1 BASFIL shl20

Equalizer 1 BASFIL shl30

Equalizer 1 BASFIL shl40

Equalizer 1 BASFIL shl50

Equalizer 1 BASFIL shl60

Equalizer 1 BASFIL shl70

Equalizer 1 BASFIL shl80

Equalizer 1 BASFIL shl90

Equalizer 1 BASFIL dep00

Equalizer 1 BASFIL dep10

Equalizer 1 BASFIL dep20

Equalizer 1 BASFIL dep30

Equalizer 1 BASFIL dep40

Equalizer 1 BASFIL dep50

Equalizer 1 BASFIL dep60

Equalizer 1 BASFIL dep75

Equalizer 1 BASFIL dep90

Equalizer 1 SPRK-EQ w/b

Equalizer 1 SPRK-EQ med

Category

Type

Equalizer 1 SPRK-EQup bas

Equalizer 1 SPRK-EQup w/b

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q10-04KL

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q10-04KR

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q10-05KL

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q10-05KR

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q10-06KL

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q10-06KR

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q10-07KL

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q10-07KR

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q10-08KL

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q10-08KR

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q10-09KL

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q10-09KR

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q10-10KL

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q10-10KR

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q10-11KL

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q10-11KR

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q10-12KL

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q10-12KR

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q10-13KL

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q10-13KR

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q10-14KL

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q10-14KR

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q10-15KL

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q10-15KR

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q10-16KL

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q10-16KR

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q10-17KL

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q10-17KR

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q10-18KL

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q10-18KR

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q10-19KL

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q10-19KR

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q10-20KL

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q10-20KR

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q14-04KL

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q14-04KR

Category

Type

Reference

EN-215

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q14-05KL

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q14-05KR

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q14-06KL

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q14-06KR

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q14-07KL

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q14-07KR

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q14-08KL

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q14-08KR

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q14-09KL

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q14-09KR

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q14-10KL

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q14-10KR

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q14-11KL

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q14-11KR

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q14-12KL

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q14-12KR

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q14-13KL

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q14-13KR

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q14-14KL

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q14-14KR

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q14-15KL

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q14-15KR

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q14-16KL

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q14-16KR

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q14-17KL

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q14-17KR

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q14-18KL

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q14-18KR

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q14-19KL

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q14-19KR

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q14-20KL

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q14-20KR

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q20-04KL

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q20-04KR

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q20-05KL

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q20-05KR

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q20-06KL

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q20-06KR

Category

Type

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q20-07KL

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q20-07KR

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q20-08KL

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q20-08KR

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q20-09KL

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q20-09KR

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q20-10KL

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q20-10KR

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q20-11KL

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q20-11KR

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q20-12KL

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q20-12KR

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q20-13KL

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q20-13KR

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q20-14KL

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q20-14KR

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q20-15KL

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q20-15KR

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q20-16KL

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q20-16KR

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q20-17KL

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q20-17KR

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q20-18KL

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q20-18KR

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q20-19KL

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q20-19KR

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q20-20KL

Equalizer 2 E-Hb6Q20-20KR

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt00 BypL

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt00 BypR

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 BypL

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 BypR

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 020L

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 020R

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 030L

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 030R

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 040L

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 040R

Category

Type

Reference

EN-216

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 050L

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 050R

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 060L

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 060R

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 070L

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 070R

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 080L

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 080R

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 090L

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 090R

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 100L

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 100R

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 110L

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 110R

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 120L

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 120R

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 130L

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 130R

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 140L

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 140R

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 150L

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 150R

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 160L

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 160R

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 170L

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 170R

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 180L

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 180R

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 190L

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 190R

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 200L

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 200R

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 210L

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 210R

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 220L

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 220R

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 230L

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 230R

Category

Type

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 240L

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 240R

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 250L

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 250R

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 260L

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 260R

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 270L

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 270R

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 280L

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 280R

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 290L

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 290R

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 300L

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 300R

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 310L

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 310R

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 320L

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 320R

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 330L

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 330R

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 340L

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 340R

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 350L

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 350R

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 360L

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 360R

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 370L

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 370R

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 380L

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 380R

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 390L

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 390R

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 400L

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 400R

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 410L

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 410R

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 420L

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 420R

Category

Type

Reference

EN-217

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 430L

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 430R

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 440L

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 440R

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 450L

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 450R

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 460L

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 460R

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 470L

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 470R

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 480L

Equalizer 3 E-LoCt06 480R

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-3-04KL

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-3-04KR

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-3-05KL

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-3-05KR

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-3-06KL

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-3-06KR

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-3-07KL

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-3-07KR

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-3-08KL

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-3-08KR

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-3-09KL

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-3-09KR

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-3-10KL

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-3-10KR

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-3-11KL

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-3-11KR

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-3-12KL

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-3-12KR

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-3-13KL

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-3-13KR

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-3-14KL

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-3-14KR

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-3-15KL

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-3-15KR

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-3-16KL

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-3-16KR

Category

Type

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-3-17KL

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-3-17KR

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-3-18KL

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-3-18KR

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-3-19KL

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-3-19KR

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-3-20KL

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-3-20KR

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-6-04KL

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-6-04KR

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-6-05KL

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-6-05KR

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-6-06KL

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-6-06KR

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-6-07KL

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-6-07KR

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-6-08KL

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-6-08KR

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-6-09KL

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-6-09KR

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-6-10KL

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-6-10KR

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-6-11KL

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-6-11KR

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-6-12KL

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-6-12KR

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-6-13KL

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-6-13KR

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-6-14KL

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-6-14KR

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-6-15KL

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-6-15KR

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-6-16KL

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-6-16KR

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-6-17KL

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-6-17KR

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-6-18KL

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-6-18KR

Category

Type

Reference

EN-218

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-6-19KL

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-6-19KR

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-6-20KL

Equalizer 4 E-40Q2-6-20KR

Equalizer 4 E-001Lo12 L

Equalizer 4 E-001Lo12 R

Equalizer 4 E-001Lo16 L

Equalizer 4 E-001Lo16 R

Equalizer 4 E-002LoMd12 L

Equalizer 4 E-002LoMd12 R

Equalizer 4 E-002LoMd16 L

Equalizer 4 E-002LoMd16 R

Equalizer 4 E-003HiMd12 L

Equalizer 4 E-003HiMd12 R

Equalizer 4 E-003HiMd16 L

Equalizer 4 E-003HiMd16 R

Equalizer 4 E-004Hi12 L

Equalizer 4 E-004Hi12 R

Equalizer 4 E-004Hi16 L

Equalizer 4 E-004Hi16 R

Song 1 S-Albeniz L

Song 1 S-Albeniz R

Song 1 S-Bch-FrnchL

Song 1 S-Bch-FrnchR

Song 1 S-Bch-FrnchEL

Song 1 S-Bch-FrnchER

Song 1 S-Bet-Sn2301L

Song 1 S-Bet-Sn2301R

Song 1 S-Bet-Sn2302L

Song 1 S-Bet-Sn2302R

Song 1 S-Bet-Sn2303L

Song 1 S-Bet-Sn2303R

Song 1 S-Bet-Sn3201L

Song 1 S-Bet-Sn3201R

Song 1 S-Bet-Sn3202L

Song 1 S-Bet-Sn3202R

Song 1 S-Biz-HorrowL

Song 1 S-Biz-HorrowR

Category

Type

Song 1 S-Brm-HangarL

Song 1 S-Brm-HangarR

Song 1 S-Brm-IntermL

Song 1 S-Brm-IntermR

Song 1 S-Brm-VWaltzL

Song 1 S-Brm-VWaltzR

Song 1 S-Brm-VariatL

Song 1 S-Brm-VariatR

Song 1 S-Chp-Etude9L

Song 1 S-Chp-Etude9R

Song 1 S-Chp-EtudeFL

Song 1 S-Chp-EtudeFR

Song 1 S-Chp-MazulkL

Song 1 S-Chp-MazulkR

Song 1 S-Chp-TarantL

Song 1 S-Chp-TarantR

Song 1 S-Chp-WaltzDL

Song 1 S-Chp-WaltzDR

Song 1 S-Chp-WalzDbL

Song 1 S-Chp-WalzDbR

Song 1 S-Chp-WaltzGL

Song 1 S-Chp-WaltzGR

Song 1 S-Deb-Etude L

Song 1 S-Deb-Etude R

Song 1 S-Deb-Pre113L

Song 1 S-Deb-Pre113R

Song 1 S-Deb-PreludL

Song 1 S-Deb-PreludR

Song 1 S-Gsh-NobodyL

Song 1 S-Gsh-NobodyR

Song 1 S-Gsh-TheManL

Song 1 S-Gsh-TheManR

Song 1 S-Grn-Goya L

Song 1 S-Grn-Goya R

Song 1 S-Grg-Lyric L

Song 1 S-Grg-Lyric R

Song 1 S-Hyd-SonataL

Song 1 S-Hyd-SonataR

Category

Type

Reference

EN-219

Song 1 S-Lzt-Annee L

Song 1 S-Lzt-Annee R

Song 1 S-Lzt-Etude L

Song 1 S-Lzt-Etude R

Song 1 S-Lzt-Garop L

Song 1 S-Lzt-Garop R

Song 1 S-Lzt-Valse L

Song 1 S-Lzt-Valse R

Song 1 S-Prk-Etude L

Song 1 S-Prk-Etude R

Song 1 S-Rvl-Valse L

Song 1 S-Rvl-Valse R

Song 1 S-Scl-SonataL

Song 1 S-Scl-SonataR

Song 1 S-Sch-Inter L

Song 1 S-Sch-Inter R

Song 1 S-Sch-KinderL

Song 1 S-Sch-KinderR

Song 1 S-Sch-Scene L

Song 1 S-Sch-Scene R

Song 1 S-Tch-SeasonL

Song 1 S-Tch-SeasonR

Song 2 S-AllMyLov L

Song 2 S-AllMyLov R

Song 2 S-AllTheTngsL

Song 2 S-AllTheTngsR

Song 2 S-BegnTheBegL

Song 2 S-BegnTheBegR

Song 2 S-BirdLndSuiL

Song 2 S-BirdLndSuiR

Song 2 S-CountryIntL

Song 2 S-CountryIntR

Song 2 S-Country L

Song 2 S-Country R

Song 2 S-FutureMem L

Song 2 S-FutureMem R

Song 2 S-Hubris L

Song 2 S-Hubris R

Category

Type

Song 2 S-IllNevSmilL

Song 2 S-IllNevSmilR

Song 2 S-ItsTalkTwnL

Song 2 S-ItsTalkTwnR

Song 2 S-LadyBGood L

Song 2 S-LadyBGood R

Song 2 S-LovBloom L

Song 2 S-LovBloom R

Song 2 S-MistyCd L

Song 2 S-MistyCd R

Song 2 S-MistyRe L

Song 2 S-MistyRe R

Song 2 S-MyFavor L

Song 2 S-MyFavor R

Song 2 S-MySongInt L

Song 2 S-MySongInt R

Song 2 S-MySong L

Song 2 S-MySong R

Song 2 S-OneOclk L

Song 2 S-OneOclk R

Song 2 S-RusanLulbyL

Song 2 S-RusanLulbyR

Song 2 S-SundaySng L

Song 2 S-SundaySng R

Song 2 S-ThtOldFeelL

Song 2 S-ThtOldFeelR

Song 2 S-WhatNotSo L

Song 2 S-WhatNotSo R

Song 2 S-WhereWereUL

Song 2 S-WhereWereUR

Song 2 S-KJKolnP1 L

Song 2 S-KJKolnP1 R

Song 2 S-KJKolnP2 L

Song 2 S-KJKolnP2 R

Song 2 S-KJKolnP3 L

Song 2 S-KJKolnP3 R

Song 2 S-KJKolnP4 L

Song 2 S-KJKolnP4 R

Category

Type

Reference

EN-220

Song 2 S-SoftAs L

Song 2 S-SoftAs R

Song 2 S-SpkLike L

Song 2 S-SpkLike R

Song 2 S-Longing L

Song 2 S-Longing R

Song 2 S-Woods L

Song 2 S-Woods R

Song 2 S-CoronationL

Song 2 S-CoronationR

Song 2 S-Entertain L

Song 2 S-Entertain R

Song 2 S-Fatrances L

Song 2 S-Fatrances R

Song 2 S-MapleLfDryL

Song 2 S-MapleLfDryR

Song 2 S-MapleLfHalL

Song 2 S-MapleLfHalR

Song 2 S-NumbFum L

Song 2 S-NumbFum R

Song 2 S-Paragon L

Song 2 S-Paragon R

Song 2 S-RiffsSp L

Song 2 S-RiffsSp R

Song 2 S-SingRain L

Song 2 S-SingRain R

Song 2 S-SomeStool L

Song 2 S-SomeStool R

Song 2 S-Spaghetti L

Song 2 S-Spaghetti R

Song 3 S-Bhm-Tst L

Song 3 S-Bhm-Tst R

Song 3 S-Bhm-Edt L

Song 3 S-Bhm-Edt R

Song 3 S-Bhm-PfTst L

Song 3 S-Bhm-PfTst R

Song 3 S-Bhm-PfTst0L

Song 3 S-Bhm-PfTst0R

Category

Type

Song 3 S-Bhm-PfTs1bL

Song 3 S-Bhm-PfTs1bR

Song 3 S-Bhm-PfTst1L

Song 3 S-Bhm-PfTst1R

Song 3 S-Bhm-PfTst2L

Song 3 S-Bhm-PfTst2R

Song 3 S-Bhm-IntF1 L

Song 3 S-Bhm-IntF1 R

Song 3 S-Bhm-IntF2 L

Song 3 S-Bhm-IntF2 R

Song 3 S-Bhm-IntNz1L

Song 3 S-Bhm-IntNz1R

Song 3 S-Bhm-IntNz2L

Song 3 S-Bhm-IntNz2R

Song 3 S-Bhm-IntNz3L

Song 3 S-Bhm-IntNz3R

Song 3 S-BhmRePfFltL

Song 3 S-BhmRePfFltR

Song 3 S-Clk-IntFltL

Song 3 S-Clk-IntFltR

Song 3 S-BhmRe-F1 L

Song 3 S-BhmRe-F1 R

Song 3 S-BhmRe-F2 L

Song 3 S-BhmRe-F2 R

Song 3 S-BhmRe-Nz L

Song 3 S-BhmRe-Nz R

Song 3 S-BhmReFul12L

Song 3 S-BhmReFul12R

Song 3 S-BhmRe-Flt L

Song 3 S-BhmRe-Flt R

Song 3 S-BhmJp-Pf06L

Song 3 S-BhmJp-Pf06R

Song 3 S-BhmJpPfFltL

Song 3 S-BhmJpPfFltR

Song 3 S-BhmJpInt12L

Song 3 S-BhmJpInt12R

Song 3 S-BhmJpFul12L

Song 3 S-BhmJpFul12R

Category

Type

Reference

EN-221

Song 3 S-BhmJp-Flt L

Song 3 S-BhmJp-Flt R

Song 3 S-ImgIntFlt L

Song 3 S-ImgIntFlt R

Song 3 S-ImgFulFlt L

Song 3 S-ImgFulFlt R

Song 3 S-Img-Int12 L

Song 3 S-Img-Int12 R

Song 3 S-Img-Ful12 L

Song 3 S-Img-Ful12 R

Song 3 S-ImgCd-Int L

Song 3 S-ImgCd-Int R

Song 3 S-ImgCd-Ful L

Song 3 S-ImgCd-Ful R

Song 3 S-ImgNw-Int L

Song 3 S-ImgNw-Int R

Song 3 S-ImgNw-Ful L

Song 3 S-ImgNw-Ful R

Song 3 S-ImgRe-Int L

Song 3 S-ImgRe-Int R

Song 3 S-ImgRe-Ful L

Song 3 S-ImgRe-Ful R

Song 3 S-LdyM-Int12L

Song 3 S-LdyM-Int12R

Song 3 S-LdyM-Int14L

Song 3 S-LdyM-Int14R

Song 3 S-LdyM-A12 L

Song 3 S-LdyM-A12 R

Song 3 S-LdyM-B12 L

Song 3 S-LdyM-B12 R

Song 3 S-LdyMIntFltL

Song 3 S-LdyMIntFltR

Song 3 S-LdyM-Flt L

Song 3 S-LdyM-Flt R

Song 3 S-LdyM-Ful10L

Song 3 S-LdyM-Ful10R

Song 3 S-LdyMBc-IntL

Song 3 S-LdyMBc-IntR

Category

Type

Song 3 S-LdyMBc-FulL

Song 3 S-LdyMBc-FulR

Song 3 S-LdyM1c-IntL

Song 3 S-LdyM1c-IntR

Song 3 S-LdyM1c-FulL

Song 3 S-LdyM1c-FulR

Song 3 S-LdyMEdFl12L

Song 3 S-LdyMEdFl12R

Song 3 S-LIB-Flt L

Song 3 S-LIB-Flt R

Song 3 S-LIBBc-Int L

Song 3 S-LIBBc-Int R

Song 3 S-LIBBc-Ful L

Song 3 S-LIBBc-Ful R

Song 3 S-LIBCd-Int L

Song 3 S-LIBCd-Int R

Song 3 S-LIBCd-Ful L

Song 3 S-LIBCd-Ful R

Song 3 S-LIBmIntFltL

Song 3 S-LIBmIntFltR

Song 3 S-LIBMo-Int L

Song 3 S-LIBMo-Int R

Song 3 S-LIBMoInt16L

Song 3 S-LIBMoInt16R

Song 3 S-LIBMo-Ful L

Song 3 S-LIBMo-Ful R

Song 3 S-LIBsIntFltL

Song 3 S-LIBsIntFltR

Song 3 S-LIBStInt16L

Song 3 S-LIBStInt16R

Song 4 S-ClkCd-Int1L

Song 4 S-ClkCd-Int1R

Song 4 S-ClkCd-Int2L

Song 4 S-ClkCd-Int2R

Song 4 S-ClkCd-Ful L

Song 4 S-ClkCd-Ful R

Song 4 S-Clk-IntFltL

Song 4 S-Clk-IntFltR

Category

Type

Reference

EN-222

Song 4 S-Clk-FulFltL

Song 4 S-Clk-FulFltR

Song 4 S-Clk-FInt12L

Song 4 S-Clk-FInt12R

Song 4 S-Clk-Full12L

Song 4 S-Clk-Full12R

Song 4 S-PfManPfFltL

Song 4 S-PfManPfFltR

Song 4 S-PfMan-Int L

Song 4 S-PfMan-Int R

Song 4 S-PfMan-Ful L

Song 4 S-PfMan-Ful R

Song 4 S-PfMan-Flt L

Song 4 S-PfMan-Flt R

Song 4 S-PfManInt12L

Song 4 S-PfManInt12R

Song 4 S-PfMan-Ful6L

Song 4 S-PfMan-Ful6R

Song 4 S-VInsIntRe9L

Song 4 S-VInsIntRe9R

Song 4 S-VInsCdPFltL

Song 4 S-VInsCdPFltR

Song 4 S-VInsCd-IntL

Song 4 S-VInsCd-IntR

Song 4 S-VInsCd-FulL

Song 4 S-VInsCd-FulR

Song 4 S-VInsCd-FltL

Song 4 S-VInsCd-FltR

Song 4 S-VInsRePFltL

Song 4 S-VInsRePFltR

Song 4 S-VInsRe-IntL

Song 4 S-VInsRe-IntR

Song 4 S-VInsReInt9L

Song 4 S-VInsReInt9R

Song 4 S-VInsRe-FulL

Song 4 S-VInsRe-FulR

Song 4 S-VInsRe-FltL

Song 4 S-VInsRe-FltR

Category

Type

Song 4 S-VInsRe-Fl6L

Song 4 S-VInsRe-Fl6R

Song 4 S-VInsReFl12L

Song 4 S-VInsReFl12R

Song 4 S-UrSgIntFltL

Song 4 S-UrSgIntFltR

Song 4 S-UrSg-Int12L

Song 4 S-UrSg-Int12R

Song 4 S-UrSg-1VFltL

Song 4 S-UrSg-1VFltR

Song 4 S-UrSg-1V06 L

Song 4 S-UrSg-1V06 R

Song 4 S-UrSgFulFltL

Song 4 S-UrSgFulFltR

Song 4 S-UrSg-Ful6 L

Song 4 S-UrSg-Ful6 R

Song 4 S-UrSg-Ful8 L

Song 4 S-UrSg-Ful8 R

Song 4 S-UrSg-Ful10L

Song 4 S-UrSg-Ful10R

Song 4 S-UrSgCd-IntL

Song 4 S-UrSgCd-IntR

Song 4 S-UrSgCd-FulL

Song 4 S-UrSgCd-FulR

Song 4 S-UrSgPs-IntL

Song 4 S-UrSgPs-IntR

Song 4 S-UrSgPs-FulL

Song 4 S-UrSgPs-FulR

Song 4 S-HTS-PfFlt L

Song 4 S-HTS-PfFlt R

Song 4 S-HTS-Int06 L

Song 4 S-HTS-Int06 R

Song 4 S-HTS-Int12 L

Song 4 S-HTS-Int12 R

Song 4 S-HTS-FulFltL

Song 4 S-HTS-FulFltR

Song 4 S-HTS-Full12L

Song 4 S-HTS-Full12R

Category

Type

Reference

EN-223

Song 4 S-Mst-10 L

Song 4 S-Mst-10 R

Song 4 S-Mst-12 L

Song 4 S-Mst-12 R

Song 4 S-MplR1-12 L

Song 4 S-MplR1-12 R

Song 4 S-MplR2-12 L

Song 4 S-MplR2-12 R

Song 4 S-MplR3-12 L

Song 4 S-MplR3-12 R

Song 4 S-MplHi-12 L

Song 4 S-MplHi-12 R

Song 4 S-SLY-Int12 L

Song 4 S-SLY-Int12 R

Song 4 S-SLY-Ful9 L

Song 4 S-SLY-Ful9 R

Song 4 S-ThM-FulHi7L

Song 4 S-ThM-FulHi7R

Song 4 S-SLY-FulHi9L

Song 4 S-SLY-FulHi9R

Song 4 S-ThMCd-Pf9 L

Song 4 S-ThMCd-Pf9 R

Song 4 S-ThMCd-Hi10L

Song 4 S-ThMCd-Hi10R

Song 4 S-WLT-4 L

Song 4 S-WLT-4 R

Song 4 S-WLT-Hi7 L

Song 4 S-WLT-Hi7 R

Song 4 S-WLT-PfHi10L

Song 4 S-WLT-PfHi10R

Song 5 S-GrtLoveIntL

Song 5 S-GrtLoveIntR

Song 5 S-GrtLove L

Song 5 S-GrtLove R

Song 5 S-JstWay L

Song 5 S-JstWay R

Song 5 S-JstWayReInL

Song 5 S-JstWayReInR

Category

Type

Song 5 S-JstWayRe L

Song 5 S-JstWayRe R

Song 5 S-MySwtBstInL

Song 5 S-MySwtBstInR

Song 5 S-MySwtBst L

Song 5 S-MySwtBst R

Song 5 S-MySwtCdIn L

Song 5 S-MySwtCdIn R

Song 5 S-MySwtCd L

Song 5 S-MySwtCd R

Song 5 S-MySwtCpIn L

Song 5 S-MySwtCpIn R

Song 5 S-MySwtCp L

Song 5 S-MySwtCp R

Song 5 S-NtLkThsIntL

Song 5 S-NtLkThsIntR

Song 5 S-NtLkThs L

Song 5 S-NtLkThs R

Song 5 S-SvMyLovIntL

Song 5 S-SvMyLovIntR

Song 5 S-SvMyLov L

Song 5 S-SvMyLov R

Song 5 S-CzyAftIntL

Song 5 S-CzyAftIntR

Song 5 S-CzyAft L

Song 5 S-CzyAft R

Song 5 S-CzyAftReInL

Song 5 S-CzyAftReInR

Song 5 S-CzyAftRe L

Song 5 S-CzyAftRe R

Song 5 S-SumMadCdInL

Song 5 S-SumMadCdInR

Song 5 S-SumMadCd L

Song 5 S-SumMadCd R

Song 5 S-SumMadReInL

Song 5 S-SumMadReInR

Song 5 S-SumMadRe L

Song 5 S-SumMadRe R

Category

Type

Reference

EN-224

Song 5 S-NoQtrUsIntL

Song 5 S-NoQtrUsIntR

Song 5 S-NoQtrUs L

Song 5 S-NoQtrUs R

Song 5 S-NoQtrJpIntL

Song 5 S-NoQtrJpIntR

Song 5 S-NoQtrJp L

Song 5 S-NoQtrJp R

Song 5 S-NoQtrReIntL

Song 5 S-NoQtrReIntR

Song 5 S-NoQtrRe L

Song 5 S-NoQtrRe R

Song 5 S-ImNtOly1InL

Song 5 S-ImNtOly1InR

Song 5 S-ImNtOly1 L

Song 5 S-ImNtOly1 R

Song 5 S-ScientstInL

Song 5 S-ScientstInR

Song 5 S-Scientst L

Song 5 S-Scientst R

Song 5 S-SkyFullStrL

Song 5 S-SkyFullStrR

Song 5 S-Som1LkIn L

Song 5 S-Som1LkIn R

Song 5 S-Som1LkInHiL

Song 5 S-Som1LkInHiR

Song 5 S-Som1Lk L

Song 5 S-Som1Lk R

Song 5 S-StayInt L

Song 5 S-StayInt R

Song 5 S-Stay L

Song 5 S-Stay R

Song 5 S-1000miIn L

Song 5 S-1000miIn R

Song 5 S-1000miInDwL

Song 5 S-1000miInDwR

Song 5 S-1000mi L

Song 5 S-1000mi R

Category

Type

Song 5 S-1000miUpGnL

Song 5 S-1000miUpGnR

Song 5 S-WhenLvTkInL

Song 5 S-WhenLvTkInR

Song 5 S-WhenLvTk L

Song 5 S-WhenLvTk R

Song 5 S-UArReasnInL

Song 5 S-UArReasnInR

Song 5 S-UArReasn L

Song 5 S-UArReasn R

Song 5 S-Crystal L

Song 5 S-Crystal R

Song 5 S-Matrix L

Song 5 S-Matrix R

Song 5 S-NowHeSngs L

Song 5 S-NowHeSngs R

Song 5 S-ReturnToInL

Song 5 S-ReturnToInR

Song 5 S-ReturnTo L

Song 5 S-ReturnTo R

Song 5 S-Steps L

Song 5 S-Steps R

Song 5 S-WhatGame L

Song 5 S-WhatGame R

Song 5 S-Windows L

Song 5 S-Windows R

Song 5 S-CarolineInL

Song 5 S-CarolineInR

Song 5 S-Caroline L

Song 5 S-Caroline R

Song 5 S-Dreamers L

Song 5 S-Dreamers R

Song 5 S-LogicSong L

Song 5 S-LogicSong R

Category

Type

Reference

EN-225

Listed below are the types of microphone effects and the effects contained in each module from M1 to

M3 for each type.

For more information on the effects listed in the M1 to M3 columns, see “List of Effects in the

Microphone Effects Module” (page EN-227).

Microphone Effects List

Microphone Effect Type List

No.

Microphone Effect

Type Name

(Displayed)

M1 M2 M3

1 Powerful Mono 3-Band EQ Mono 3-Band EQ Delay

2 Presence Mono 3-Band EQ Mono 3-Band EQ Delay

3 Clear Mono 3-Band EQ Mono 3-Band EQ Delay

4 Soft Limiter Mono 3-Band EQ Delay

5 Rock Limiter Mono 3-Band EQ Delay

6 Bright Enh Enhancer Mono 3-Band EQ Delay

7 Presence Enh Enhancer Mono 3-Band EQ Delay

8 AmbientDelay Mono 3-Band EQ Mono 3-Band EQ Delay

9 Short Delay Mono 3-Band EQ Mono 3-Band EQ Delay

10 Echo Mono 3-Band EQ Mono 3-Band EQ Delay

11 Middle Delay Mono 3-Band EQ Mono 3-Band EQ Delay

12 Long Delay Mono 3-Band EQ Mono 3-Band EQ Delay

13 Pan Delay Mono 3-Band EQ Auto Pan Delay

14 Chorus Mono 3-Band EQ Chorus Delay

15 Phaser Mono 3-Band EQ Phaser Delay

16 Deep Phaser Mono 3-Band EQ Phaser Delay

17 PhaserChorus Mono 3-Band EQ Phaser Chorus

18 FlangerDelay Mono 3-Band EQ Flanger Delay

19 FlangerPhase Mono 3-Band EQ Flanger Phaser

20 Upper Octave Mono 3-Band EQ PitchShifter Delay

21 Lower Octave Mono 3-Band EQ PitchShifter Delay

22 Tremolo Mono 3-Band EQ Tremolo Delay

23 Vibrato Mono 3-Band EQ Chorus Delay

24 Distortion Drive Mono 3-Band EQ Mono 3-Band EQ

25 RingMod LoFi Drive Ring Modulator Mono 3-Band EQ

Reference

EN-226

Listed below are all the effects included in the Microphone Effects module.

For details on the parameters and setting ranges that can be set for each effect, see “Parameter List of

Module Effects” (page EN-228).

List of Effects in the Microphone Effects Module

No. Display Name Description



Mono 3BandEQ Mono 3-Band EQ This is a three-band monaural equalizer.



Tremolo Tremolo Shifts the volume of the input signal using an LFO.



Auto Pan Auto Pan

Shifts the continual left-right panning of the input

signal using an LFO.



Limiter Limiter

Limits the input signal level so it does not rise above

a preset level.



Enhancer Enhancer

Enhances the profiles of the low range and high

range of the input signal.



Phaser Phaser

Produces a distinctive pulsating, broad sound by

using an LFO to change the phase of the input signal

and then mixes it with the original input signal.



Chorus Chorus Gives notes depth and breadth.



Flanger Flanger

Applies wildly pulsating and metallic reverberation to

notes. Selects the LFO waveform.



Pitch PitchShifter This effect transforms the pitch of the input signal.



Ring Mod Ring Modulator

Multiplies the input signal with an internal oscillator

signal to create a metallic sound.



Delay Delay

Delays the input signal and feeds it back to create a

repeating effect.



Drive Drive Simulates the drive of a musical instrument amplifier.

Reference

EN-227

Parameter List of Module Effects

Effect

Description Settings

Display

Parameter

Name



Mono 3-Band EQ This is a three-band monaural equalizer.

EQ1 Freq EQ1 Frequency Adjusts the center frequency of Equalizer 1.

EQ1 Gain EQ1 Gain Adjusts the gain of Equalizer 1. –12 - 00 - 12

EQ2 Freq EQ2 Frequency Adjusts the center frequency of Equalizer 2.

EQ2 Gain EQ2 Gain Adjusts the gain of Equalizer 2. –12 - 00 - 12

EQ3 Freq EQ3 Frequency Adjusts the center frequency of Equalizer 3.

EQ3 Gain EQ3 Gain Adjusts the gain of Equalizer 3. –12 - 00 - 12

Input Level Input Level Adjusts the input level. 000 - 127

Wet Level Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 - 127

Dry Level Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 - 127



Tremolo Shifts the volume of the input signal using an LFO.

Rate LFO Rate Adjusts the LFO rate. 000 - 127

Depth LFO Depth Adjusts the LFO depth. 000 - 127

Waveform LFO Waveform Selects the LFO waveform. Sine, Triangle,

Trapezoid

Wet Level Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 - 127

Dry Level Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 - 127



Auto Pan Shifts the continual left-right panning of the input signal using an

LFO.

Rate LFO Rate Adjusts the LFO rate. 000 - 127

Depth LFO Depth Adjusts the LFO depth. 000 - 127

Waveform LFO Waveform Selects the LFO waveform. Sine, Triangle,

Trapezoid 1,

Trapezoid 2,

Trapezoid 3,

Trapezoid 4

Manual Manual Adjusts the pan (stereo position). –64 is full left,

0 is center, and +63 is full right.

–64 - 00 - 63

Wet Level Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 - 127

Dry Level Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 - 127

Reference

EN-228



Limiter Limits the input signal level so it does not rise above a preset

level.

Limit Limit Adjusts the volume level of the limit at which

limiting is applied.

000 - 127

Attack Attack Adjusts the time until the compression effect

starts. A smaller value causes prompt limiter

operation, which suppresses the attack of the

input signal. A larger values delays limiter

operation, which causes the attack of the input

signal to be output as-is.

000 - 127

Release Release Adjusts the time until compression is released

after the input signal drops below a prescribed

level.

000 - 127

Wet Level Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. Output

volume changes in accordance with the Limit

setting and the characteristics of the input tone.

Use this parameter to correct for such changes.

000 - 127

Dry Level Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 - 127



Enhancer Enhances the profiles of the low range and high range of the input

signal.

Low Freq Low Frequency Adjusts the low range enhancer frequency. 000 - 127

Low Gain Low Gain Adjusts the low range enhancer gain. 000 - 127

High Freq High Frequency Adjusts the high range enhancer frequency. 000 - 127

High Gain High Gain Adjusts the high range enhancer gain. 000 - 127

Input Level Input Level Adjusts the input level. 000 - 127

Wet Level Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 - 127

Dry Level Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 - 127



Phaser Produces a distinctive pulsating, broad sound by using an LFO to

change the phase of the input signal and then mixes it with the

original input signal.

Resonance Resonance Adjusts the strength of feedback. 000 - 127

Manual Manual Adjusts the reference phaser shift amount. –64 - 00 - 63

Rate LFO Rate Adjusts the LFO rate. 000 - 127

Depth LFO Depth Adjusts the LFO depth. 000 - 127

Waveform LFO Waveform Selects the LFO waveform. Sine, Triangle,

Random

Input Level Input Level Adjusts the input level. 000 - 127

Wet Level Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 - 127

Dry Level Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 - 127

Effect

Description Settings

Display

Parameter

Name

Reference

EN-229



Chorus Gives notes depth and breadth.

Rate LFO Rate Adjusts the LFO rate. 000 - 127

Depth LFO Depth Adjusts the LFO depth. 000 - 127

Waveform LFO Waveform Selects the LFO waveform. Sine, Triangle

Feedback Feedback Adjusts the strength of feedback. –64 - 00 - 63

Wet Level Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 - 127

Polarity Polarity Inverts the LFO of one channel. Negative,

Positive

Input Level Input Level Adjusts the input level. 000 - 127

Dry Level Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 - 127



Flanger Applies wildly pulsating and metallic reverberation to notes.

Selects the LFO waveform.

Rate LFO Rate Adjusts the LFO rate. 000 - 127

Depth LFO Depth Adjusts the LFO depth. 000 - 127

Waveform LFO Waveform Selects the LFO waveform. Sine, Triangle,

Random

Feedback Feedback Adjusts the strength of feedback. –64 - 00 - 63

Wet Level Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 - 127

Input Level Input Level Adjusts the input level. 000 - 127

Dry Level Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 - 127



PitchShifter This effect transforms the pitch of the input signal.

PitchQuarter PitchQuarter Adjusts the pitch shift amount in quarter tone

steps.

–24 - 00 - 24

High Damp High Damp Adjusts the high-range damp. A smaller number

increases damping.

000 - 127

Feedback Feedback Adjusts the feedback amount. 000 - 127

Input Level Input Level Adjusts the input level. 000 - 127

Wet Level Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 - 127

Dry Level Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 - 127

Pitch Fine Pitch Fine Adjusts the pitch shift amount. –50 is a quarter

note decrease, while +50 is a quarter note

increase.

–50 - 00 - 50

Effect

Description Settings

Display

Parameter

Name

Reference

EN-230



Ring Modulator Multiplies the input signal with an internal oscillator signal to

create a metallic sound.

OSC Freq OSC Frequency Sets the reference frequency of the internal

oscillator.

000 - 127

Rate LFO Rate Adjusts the LFO rate. 000 - 127

Depth LFO Depth Adjusts the LFO depth. 000 - 127

Tone Tone Adjusts the timbre of the ring modulator input

sound.

000 - 127

Wet Level Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 - 127

Dry Level Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 - 127



Delay Delays the input signal and feeds it back to create a repeating

effect.

Time Delay Time Adjusts the total delay time in 1 ms units. 0001 - 1099

L.Time Ratio Delay Ratio L Adjusts the ratio of the left channel relative to

the total delay time.

000 - 127

R.Time Ratio Delay Ratio R Adjusts the ratio of the right channel relative to

the total delay time.

000 - 127

L.Level Delay Level L Adjusts the level of the left channel. 000 - 127

R.Level Delay Level R Adjusts the level of the right channel. 000 - 127

FeedbackType

Feedback Type Selects the feedback type.

Stereo: Stereo feedback

Cross: Cross feedback

Stereo, Cross

Feedback Lvl

Feedback Adjusts the feedback amount. 000 - 127

High Damp High Damp Adjusts the high-range damp. A smaller number

increases damping.

000 - 127

Tmpo Sync Delay Tempo

Sync

Specifies how the actual total delay time is

synced with tempo.

Off: Uses Delay Time value.

1/4 to 1: Uses value in accordance with number

of beats.

Off, 1/4, 1/3,

3/8, 1/2, 2/3,

3/4, 1

Input Level Input Level Adjusts the input level. 000 - 127

Dry Level Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 - 127

Wet Level Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 - 127

Effect

Description Settings

Display

Parameter

Name

Reference

EN-231

*1 100Hz, 125Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz, 250Hz, 315Hz, 400Hz, 500Hz, 630Hz, 800Hz, 1.0kHz, 1.3kHz,

1.6kHz, 2.0kHz, 2.5kHz, 3.2kHz, 4.0kHz, 5.0kHz, 6.3kHz, 8.0kHz



Drive Simulates the drive of a musical instrument amplifier.

Type Drive Type Selects the drive type.

1 - 20

Gain Gain Adjusts the driver input signal gain. 000 - 127

Output Level

Level Adjusts the drive output level. 000 - 127

Wet Level Wet Level Adjusts the level of the effect sound. 000 - 127

Dry Level Dry Level Adjusts the level of the direct sound. 000 - 127

Settings Drive Type Display Description

1 - 4 Clean1 - 4 Clean 1 - 4 Simulates a clean sound with little distortion.

5 - 8 Crunch1 - 4 Crunch 1 - 4

Simulates a crisp crunch sound with little

distortion.

9 - 12 Overdrive1 - 4 Overdrive 1 - 4

Simulates an overdrive sound with mellow

distortion.

13 - 16 Distortion1 - 4 Distort 1 - 4 Simulates a hard, straight distortion sound.

17 - 20 Metal1 - 4 Metal 1 - 4

Simulates an extreme and weighty distortion

sound that is suitable for heavy metal music.

Effect

Description Settings

Display

Parameter

Name

Reference

EN-232

Listed below are the Arpeggiator patterns. When the “Recommended Setup” is “On”, when the

Arpeggiator is switched from off to on, or when “Pattern” is switched while the Arpeggiator is on, the

“Recommended Setup” listed are automatically applied.

Arpeggiator List

No.

Pattern Name

(Pattern)

Recommended Setup

Remarks

The Arpeggiator’s target part

Split Point

sound

name

Arpeggio

Hold

Upper 1 Upper 2 Lower

01 Piano Sequence 1 ✓ F{3

02 Piano Sequence 2 ✓ C5 ✓

03 Piano Sequence 3 ✓ F{3 ✓

04 Piano Sequence 4 ✓ F{3 ✓

05 Piano Sequence 5 ✓ F{3

Piano Triplet Sequence

✓ F{3

07 Piano Odd Sequence ✓ F{3 ✓

08 Chordal Phrase 1 ✓ F{3 ✓

09 Chordal Phrase 2 ✓ F{3 ✓

10 Chordal Phrase 3 ✓ F{3 ✓

11 Ambient FX 1 ✓ F{3 ✓

12 Ambient FX 2 ✓ F{3 ✓

13 Single Note Sequence ✓ F{3

14 Lower EP Phrase ✓ C3 ✓

15 Layered EP Phrase ✓ F{3 ✓

16 Layered EP Arpeggio ✓ F{3 ✓

17 Layered Arpeggio 1 ✓ F{3 ✓

18 Layered Arpeggio 2 ✓ F{3 ✓

19 Layered Arpeggio 3 ✓ F{3 ✓

20 Layered Arpeggio 4 ✓ F{3 ✓

21 Synth Sequence ✓ F{2 ✓

22 Lower Strings Phrase ✓ C3 ✓

23 Walking Bass ✓ C3 ✓

24 Simple Bass ✓ C3 ✓

25 Odd Phrase Bass ✓ C3 ✓

26 Latin Piano ✓✓ F{3 ✓

27 Screw Up ✓✓ F{3

28 Screw Down ✓✓ F{3

29 Skip Up ✓✓ F{3

30 Skip Down ✓✓ F{3

Reference

EN-233

*1 When “Recommended Setup” is “On”, the Split Point is automatically set to the keyboard key in this

row when switching patterns. Therefore, the key range in which the Arpeggiator is reproduced

varies with the pattern.

*2 These patterns have the appropriate sustain effect added to the notes played by the Arpeggiator.

31 Up Up Down ✓✓ F{3

32 Down Down Up ✓✓ F{3

33 Sequence Line 1 ✓✓ F{3

34 Sequence Line 2 ✓✓ F{3

35 Sequence Line 3 ✓✓ F{3

36 Arpeggio 2Octave ✓✓ F{ 3

37 9th Arpeggio ✓✓ F{ 3

38 Ragtime ✓✓ F{3

39 8 Beat ✓ F{3

40 12/8 ✓✓ F{3

41 Waltz ✓✓ F{3

42 Shuffle Pop ✓ F{3 ✓

43 Up 1Octave 1 ✓✓ F{3

44 Up 2Octave 1 ✓✓ F{3

45 Up 1Octave 2 ✓✓ F{3

46 Up 2Octave 2 ✓✓ F{3

47 Down 1Octave 1 ✓✓ F{3

48 Down 2Octave 1 ✓✓ F{3

49 Down 1Octave 2 ✓✓ F{3

50 Down 2Octave 2 ✓✓ F{3

No.

Pattern Name

(Pattern)

Recommended Setup

Remarks

The Arpeggiator’s target part

Split Point

sound

name

Arpeggio

Hold

Upper 1 Upper 2 Lower

Function Transmitted Recognized Remarks

Basic

Channel

1 - 16

Default

Changed

Note

Number

0 - 127

True voice

Program

Change True #

After

Touch

Control

Change

Pitch Bender

Exclusive

Key’s

Ch’s

Velocity

9nH v = 1 - 127

O 9nH v = 0, 8nH v = 0 - 127

O 9nH v = 1 - 127

O 8nH v = 0 - 127

Note ON

Note OFF

Mode

Mode 3

Default

Messages

Altered

System

Common

Song Pos

Song Sel

Tune

Aux

Messages

Remarks

All sound off

Reset all controller

Local ON/OFF

All notes OFF

Active Sense

System Reset

System

Real Time

Clock

Commands

0, 32

6, 38

100, 101

Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY

Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY

Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO

Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO

O : Yes

: No

0 - 127

Model: PX-S6000 Version : 1.0

Bank select LSB/MSB

Modulation

Portamento time

Data entry LSB/MSB

Volume

Pan

Expression

Hold 1

Portamento switch

Sostenuto

Soft pedal

Filter resonance

Release time

Attack time

Brightness

Vibrato rate

Vibrato depth

Vibrato delay

Portamento control

High resolution velocity prefix

Reverb send level

Chorus send level

Delay send level

RPN LSB/MSB

MIDI Implementation Chart

*1: Depends on tone.

*2: Depends on the setup of the pedal connected to the EXPRESSION/ASSIGNABLE

jack.

*3: For details about RPN and system exclusive messages, see MIDI Implementation at

https://support.casio.com/global/en/emi/manual/PX-S6000/

*4: Depends on the knobs and the CONTROL button settings.

• The MIDI messages marked with “x” in the “Transmitted” column of the above chart

may be output along with certain operations.

MA2311-B

PXS6000-E-2B

Casio PX-S6000 Privia Digital Piano

Product's Documents

User's Guide

Specifications

Casio PX-S6000 Questions and Answers